Hyundai 2008 Elantra Owners Manual Gkflhma 11.p65
2015-09-07
: Hyundai Hyundai-2008-Elantra-Owners-Manual-762617 hyundai-2008-elantra-owners-manual-762617 hyundai pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 360 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
2008
Please consult your Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet for your vehicle's spe-
cific warranty coverage.
The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 7. As the owner, it is your
responsibility to see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at
the appropriate intervals. When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent main-
tenance is required for some operations. Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions
are also included in Section 7.
WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE
RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE
F1
OWNER'S MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.
However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that
our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and
explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you
may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehi-
cle.
F2
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the per-
formance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited
warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations estab-
lished by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-
tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose
to install one of these devices.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
F3
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
✽✽ NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other
persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the
caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
F4
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive
Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very
proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it care-
fully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai deal-
er. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the man-
ual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
Copyright 2007 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval
system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai
specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the
Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and which also appear in the Service Station Information on the back
cover of the Owner's Manual.
F5
Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts
1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same
parts used by Hyundai Motor
Company to manufacture vehicles.
They are designed and tested for the
optimum safety, performance, and reli-
ability to our customers.
2. Why should you use genuine parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi-
neered and built to meet rigid manu-
facturing requirements. Using imita-
tion, counterfeit or used salvage parts
is not covered under the Hyundai New
Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other
Hyundai warranty.
In addition, any damage to or failure of
Hyundai Genuine Parts caused by the
installation or failure of an imitation,
counterfeit or used salvage part is not
covered by any Hyundai Warranty.
3. How can you tell if you are purchas-
ing Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts
Logo on the package (see below).
Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to
the United States are packaged with
labels written only in English.
Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold
through authorized Hyundai
Dealerships.
To find the closest authorized
dealer call 1-800-826-CARS
A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L
A100A03L
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety system of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Consumer information
Specifications
I
Index
table of contents
1
How to use this manual / 1-2
Fuel requirements / 1-3
Vehicle break-in process / 1-5
Vehicle data collection and event data
recorders / 1-6
Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster / 1-7
Introduction
Introduction
21
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your vehi-
cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you
in many ways. We strongly recommend
that you read the entire manual. In order
to minimize the chance of death or injury,
you must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words in this
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
vehicle. By reading your manual, you
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under vari-
ous road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is pro-
vided in the Table of Contents. A good
place to start is the index; it has an alpha-
betical listing of all information in your
manual.
Sections: This manual has nine sections
plus an index. Each section begins with a
brief list of contents so you can tell at a
glance if that section has the information
you want.
You will find various WARNING’s,
CAUTION’s, and NOTICE’s in this manu-
al. These were prepared to enhance your
personal safety.You should carefully read
and follow ALL procedures and recom-
mendations provided in these
WARNING’s, CAUTION’s and NOTICE’s.
✽✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or help-
ful information is being provided.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which harm, serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the caution is ignored.
13
Introduction
Gasoline engine
Unleaded
Your new vehicle is designed to use only
unleaded fuel having a pump octane
number ((R+M)/2) of 87 or highter.
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEADED
FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emis-
sions and spark plug fouling.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),
and gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol (also known as wood alcohol)
are being marketed along with or instead
of leaded or unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or
gasohol containing any methanol. Either
of these fuels may cause drivability prob-
lems and damage to the fuel system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or driveability problems
may not be covered by the manufactur-
er’s warranty if they result from the use
of:
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 per-
cent gasoline, and is manufactured
exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel
Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible with
your vehicle. Use of “E85” may result in
poor engine performance and damage to
your vehicle's engine and fuel system.
Hyundai recommends that customers do
not use fuel with an ethanol content
exceeding 10 percent.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Consult
an authorized Hyundai dealer for
details.)
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any
gasohol product which impairs dri-
vability.
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Tighten the cap until it clicks, oth-
erwise the Check Engine
light will illuminate.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
does not cover damage to the fuel
system or any performance prob-
lems caused by the use of “E85” fuel.
Introduction
41
Use of MTBE
We recommend that fuels containing
MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over
15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7%
weight) should not be used in your vehi-
cle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may
reduce vehicle performance and produce
vapor lock or hard starting.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-
hol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-
formance and damage components of
the fuel system.
Gasolines for cleaner air
To help contribute to cleaner air, we rec-
ommend that you use gasolines treated
with detergent additives, which help pre-
vent deposit formation in the engine.
These gasolines will help the engine run
cleaner and enhance performance of the
Emission Control System.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle in
another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding reg-
istration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-
able.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
may not cover damage to the fuel
system and performance problems
that are caused by the use of
methanol or fuels containing
methanol.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance prob-
lems that are caused by the use of
fuels containing methanol or fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
15
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
No special break-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for the
first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to
the performance, economy and life of
your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute)
between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-
cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-
erly.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than 3
minutes at one time.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200
miles (2,000 km) of operation.
Introduction
61
Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with
many high technology, electronically
controlled systems that help to
ensure your vehicle operates properly
and provides the performance that
you expect. These systems utilize
computers to monitor the operation of
various systems and components and
help to control their operation. These
computerized system operations are
wide-ranging and involve components
to reduce emissions, to continuously
evaluate the readiness of the airbag
and seat belt pretensioner systems, to
determine when the airbag and seat
belt pre-tensioner systems should be
deployed and then to activate the
deployment, and if equipped, to oper-
ate anti-lock braking, traction control
and electrical stability control to
assist the driver to control the vehicle
in difficult driving situations. These
systems electronically store informa-
tion that is useful to service techni-
cians when they need to diagnose and
repair these systems.
Additional information is stored only
when a crash occurs that results in
the deployment of the airbags or seat
belt pre-tensioners. This type of data
storage is done by devices called
event data recorders(EDR).
After a crash event, the airbag and
seat belt pre-tensioner computer sys-
tem, known as the Supplemental
Restraint System Control Module
(SRSCM) or Airbag Control Unit
(ACU), may record some information
about the condition of the vehicle and
how it was being operated. This infor-
mation consists of data related to seat
belt usage and if there was diagnostic
information in the airbag or seat belt
systems at the time that a crash
occurred, and if the ACU sensed that a
crash of sufficient severity occurred
to require seat belt pre-tensioner or
airbag deployment.
To retrieve this information, special
equipment is needed and access to
the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. Hyundai will not
access information about a crash
event or share it with others except:
• in response to an official request of
police or similar government office,
or
• with the consent of the vehicle
owner or, if the vehicle is leased,
with the consent of the lessee, or
• as part of Hyundai’s defense of liti-
gation, or
• as required by law.
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
17
Introduction
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Door ajar warning light
Seat belt warning light
High beam indicator
Turn signal indicator lights
Front fog light indicator (If equipped)
ABS warning light (If equipped)
Parking brake & Brake fluid warning
Engine oil pressure warning
Charging system warning
ESC indicator (If equipped)
ESC OFF indicator (If equipped)
Malfunction indicator lamp (If equipped)
Air bag warning light (If equipped)
Cruise indicator (If equipped)
Cruise SET indicator (If equipped)
Low fuel level warning
Low washer fluid level warning indicator
Electronic power steering (EPS) system warning light
Trunk lid open warning light
* For more detailed explanations, refer to section 4, “Instrument cluster”.
ESC
ESC
OFF
2
Interior overview / 2-2
Instrument panel overview / 2-3
Your vehicle at a glance
Your vehicle at a glance
22
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Door lock/unlock button ............................4-8
2. Outside rearview mirror control switch*.....4-37
3. Central door lock switch* ..........................4-9
4. Power window lock switch*.....................4-17
5. Power window switches* ........................4-14
6. Trunk lid release button ..........................4-12
7. Fuse box ..................................................7-46
8. ESC OFF button*....................................5-21
9. Instrument panel illumination..................4-39
10. Steering wheel tilt .................................4-29
11. Hood release lever ...............................4-18
12. Brake pedal ..........................................5-16
13. Accelerator pedal....................................5-6
14. Parking brake lever ...............................5-18
* : if equipped
OHD006001L
23
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Driver’s air bag................................3-37
2. Light control / Turn signals ..............4-51
3. Instrument cluster ...........................4-38
4. Wiper/Washer..................................4-54
5. Auto cruise controls* .......................5-26
6. Ignition switch ...................................5-4
7. Steering wheel ................................4-28
8. Digital clock ........................................4-85
9. Audio controls* .......................4-88, 4-92
10. Climate control system* ................4-60
11. Hazard warning flasher switch......4-50
12. Seat warmer* ..................................3-6
13. Shift lever ........................................5-7
14. Cigar lighter...................................4-82
15. Power outlet ..................................4-84
16. Ashtray ..........................................4-82
17. Passenger’s air bag ......................3-38
18. Storage compartment ...................4-80
19. Vent controls .................................4-63
20. Glove box......................................4-80
* : if equipped
OHD007002N
3
Seat / 3-2
Seat belts / 3-12
Child restraint system / 3-21
Airbag-advanced supplemental restraint
system / 3-29
Safety features of your vehicle
Safety features of your vehicle
23
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward (driver seat)
(2) Seatback angle (driver seat)
(3) Seat cushion height (driver seat)*
(4) Seat warmer (driver seat)*
(5) Headrest (driver seat)
(6) Forward and backward (passenger
seat)
(7) Seatback angle (passenger seat)
(8) Headrest (passenger seat)
(9) Seat warmer (passenger seat)*
Rear seats
(10) Center armrest*
(11) Headrest
(12) Seatback folding lever
* if equipped
SEAT
OHD036001
33
Safety features of your vehicle
Front seat adjustment
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever
under the front edge of the seat cush-
ion up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust seat
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property dam-
age.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way
interfering with proper locking of
a seatback could result in serious
or fatal injury in a sudden stop or
collision.
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap por-
tion of the seat belt snug and low
across the hips. This is the best
position to protect you in case of
an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back as
possible from the steering wheel
while maintaining comfortable
control of the vehicle. It is recom-
mended that your chest is at least
10 inches (250 mm) away from
the steering wheel.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly and be sure
there are no other occupants
around the seat. If the seatback is
returned without being held and
controlled, the back of the seat
could spring forward resulting in
accidental injury to a person struck
by the seatback.
OHD036002
WARNING - Loose objects
Loose objects in the driver’s foot
area could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident. Do not place
anything under the front seats.
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked into
place by attempting to move the
seat forward or reverse without
using the lock release lever.
Sudden or unexpected movement
of the driver's seat could cause you
to lose control of the vehicle result-
ing in an accident.
Safety features of your vehicle
43
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the
seatback recline lever located on the
outside of the seat at the rear.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and
adjust the seatback of the seat to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seatback is locked in place. (The lever
MUST return to its original position for
the seatback to lock.)
Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)
To change the height of the seat cushion,
push the lever located on the outside of
the seat cushion up or down.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever
up several times.
OHD036003
WARNING - Driver respon-
sibility for front seat pas-
senger
Riding in a vehicle with a front seat-
back reclined could lead to serious
or fatal injury in an accident. If a
front seat is reclined during an
accident, the occupant’s hips may
slide under the lap portion of the
seat belt applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result.
The driver must advise the front
passenger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever the
vehicle is in motion.
OHD036004
35
Safety features of your vehicle
Headrest
Active headrest (if equipped)
The active headrest is designed to move
forward and upward during a rear impact.
This helps to prevent the driver's and
front passenger’s head from moving
backward and thus helps prevent neck
injuries.
Forward and backward adjustment
(if equipped)
The headrest may be adjusted forward to
three different positions by pulling the
headrest forward. To adjust the headrest
backward, pull it fully forward to the far-
thest position and release it. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports the
head and neck.
OHD036005HNF2041-1
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height as the top of the occu-
pant's eyes. Also adjust the head-
rest so its distance from the head
is as wide as your fist. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to the occupants may
occur in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protec-
tion against neck injuries when
properly adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest height
while the vehicle is in motion.
Safety features of your vehicle
63
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button (1)
while pulling upward (2).
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
front seats during cold weather. With the
ignition switch in the ON position, push
either of the switches to warm the driver's
seat or the front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
"OFF" position.
✽✽NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
OHD036007OHD036006 OHD036008
37
Safety features of your vehicle
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on the
back of the front passenger’s and driver’s
seatbacks.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. In particular, the
driver must exercise extreme care
for the following types of passen-
gers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or hand-
icapped persons, or hospital out-
patients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place blankets,
cushions or seat covers on the
seats while the seat warmer is in
operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp objects
in the seatback pockets. In an acci-
dent they could come loose from
the pocket and injure vehicle occu-
pants.
OHD036009
Safety features of your vehicle
83
Rear seat adjustment
Headrest
The headrest not only provides comfort
for passengers, but also helps to protect
the head and neck in the event of a colli-
sion.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button
(1) while pulling upward (2).
OHD036011 OHD036012
WARNING
For proper operation of the occu-
pant classification system:
• Do not place any items cumula-
tively weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg)
in the seatback pocket or on the
seat.
• Do not hang onto the front pas-
senger seat.
39
Safety features of your vehicle
Armrest (if equipped)
To use the armrest, pull it forward from
the seatback.
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height as the top of the occu-
pant's eyes. The use of a cushion
that holds the body away from
the seatback is not recommend-
ed.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to an occupant may occur
in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protec-
tion against severe neck injuries
when properly adjusted.
OHD036010
CAUTION
• Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P or the
manual transaxle is in neutral and
the parking brake is applied
whenever loading or unloading
cargo. Vehicle may move if shift
lever is inadvertently moved to
another position.
• Be careful when loading cargo
into the rear passenger seats to
prevent damage to the vehicle
interior.
• When cargo is loaded into the
rear passenger seats, ensure the
cargo is properly secured to pre-
vent it from moving while driving.
Unsecured cargo in the passen-
ger compartment can cause dam-
age to the vehicle or injury to it’s
occupants.
Safety features of your vehicle
103
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks may be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Set the front seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the
front seat forward.
2. Lower the rear headrests to the lowest
position.
3. Pull out the seatback locking knob in
the trunk, then fold the seat toward the
front of the vehicle.
4. For center shoulder belt, insert the belt
webbing in the right side rear shoulder
belt guide to prevent the belt from
being trapped under the seat.
5. When you return the seatback to its
upright position, always be sure it has
locked into position by pushing on the
top of the seatback.
WARNING
The purpose of the fold-down rear
seatbacks is to allow you to carry
longer objects than could other-
wise be accommodated.
Never allow passengers to sit on
top of the folded down seatback
while the car is moving as this is
not a proper seating position and
no seat belts are available for use.
This could result in serious injury
or death in case of an accident or
sudden stop. Objects carried on the
folded down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of the
front seats. This could allow cargo
to slide forward and cause injury or
damage during sudden stops.
OHD036025 OHD036123L
311
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after being
folded down:
Be careful not to damage the seat
belt webbing or buckle. Do not
allow the seat belt webbing or
buckle to get caught or pinched in
the rear seat. Ensure that the seat-
back is completely locked into its
upright position by pushing on the
top of the seaback. Otherwise, in an
accident or sudden stop, the seat
could fold down and allow cargo to
enter the passenger compartment,
which could result in serious injury
or death.
OHD036124L
CAUTION - Rear seat belts
When returning the rear seatbacks
to the upright position, remember
to return the rear center shoulder
belt to its proper position.
WARNING - Cargo
Cargo should always be secured to
prevent it from being thrown about
the vehicle in a collision and caus-
ing injury to the vehicle occupants.
Special care should be taken of
objects placed in the rear seats,
since those may hit the front seat
occupants in a frontal collision.
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P or the
manual transaxle is in neutral and
the parking brake is applied when-
ever loading or unloading cargo.
Failure to take these steps may
allow the vehicle to move if shift
lever is inadvertently moved to
another position.
Safety features of your vehicle
123
Seat belt restraint system
Seat belt warning
Seat belt warning light
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition key is turned ON, the
seat belt warning light blinks for approxi-
mately 6 seconds. And if the vehicle
speed exceeds 10km/h with the seat belt
unfastened, the seat belt warning light
blinks with the pattern of 6 seconds on
and 24 seconds off for 11 times.The seat
belt warning light will stop if the seat belt
is fastened or the vehicle speed is
reduced to below 5km/h.
SEAT BELTS
1GQA2083
WARNING
• For maximum restraint system
protection, the seat belts must
always be used whenever the car
is moving.
• Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow chil-
dren to ride in the front passen-
ger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he/she
must be properly belted and the
seat should be moved as far back
as possible.
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash. The shoulder
belt should be positioned midway
over your shoulder across your
collarbone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.
A twisted belt can't do its job as
well. In a collision, it could even
cut into you. Be sure the belt
webbing is straight and not twist-
ed.
• Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. If the belt
webbing or hardware is dam-
aged, replace it.
313
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt warning chime
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition key is turned ON, the
seat belt warning chime sounds for
approximately 6 seconds. And if the vehi-
cle speed exceeds 10km/h with the seat
belt unfastened, the seat belt warning
chime sounds with the pattern of 6 sec-
onds on and 24 seconds off for 11
times.The seat belt warning chime will
stop if the seat belt is fastened or the
vehicle speed is reduced to below 5km/h.
Seat belt - Driver’s 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into
the buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt por-
tion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean for-
ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will
extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
You can adjust the height of the shoulder
belt anchor to one of 4 positions for max-
imum comfort and safety.
If the height of the adjusting seat belt is
too near your neck, you will not be getting
the most effective protection. The shoul-
der portion should be adjusted so that it
lies across your chest and midway over
your shoulder nearest the door and not
your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster
into an appropriate position.
OHD036019
B180A01NF
1
2
Safety features of your vehicle
143
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).
To lower it, push it down (3) while press-
ing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has locked
into position.
Seat belts - Front passenger and rear
seat 3-point system with combination
locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt
Combination retractor type seat belts are
installed in the rear seat positions to help
accommodate the installation of child
restraint systems. Although a combina-
tion retractor is also installed in the front
passenger seat position, we strongly rec-
ommend that children always be seated
in the rear seat. NEVER place any infant
restraint system in the front seat of the
vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the fea-
tures of both an emergency locking
retractor seat belt and an automatic lock-
ing retractor seat belt. To fasten your seat
belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert
the metal tab into the buckle. There will
be an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle. When not securing a
child restraint, the seat belt operates in
the same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It
automatically adjusts to the proper length
only after the lap belt portion of the seat
belt is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips.
WARNING
• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is
locked into position at the appro-
priate height. Never position the
shoulder belt across your neck or
face. Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious injuries
in an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts after
an accident could leave you with
damaged seat belts that will not
provide protection in the event of
another collision leading to per-
sonal injury or death. Replace
your seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
B200A01NF
WARNING
You should place the lap belt por-
tion as low as possible and snugly
across your hips, not on your waist.
If the lap belt is located too high on
your waist, it may increase the
chance of injury in the event of a
collision. Both arms should not be
under or over the belt. Rather, one
should be over and the other under,
as shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the
arm nearest the door.
315
Safety features of your vehicle
When the seat belt is fully extended from
the retractor to allow the installation of a
child restraint system, the seat belt oper-
ation changes to allow the belt to retract,
but not to extend (Automatic Locking
Retractor Type). Refer to “Using a child
restraint system” in this section.
✽✽NOTICE
Although the combination retractor
provides the same level of protection for
seated passengers in either emergency
or automatic locking modes, it is recom-
mended that seated passengers use the
emergency locking feature for improved
convenience. The automatic locking
function is intended to facilitate child
restraint installation. To convert from
the automatic locking feature to the
emergency locking operation mode,
allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully
retract.
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing the
release button (1) in the locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should auto-
matically draw back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to
be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and
front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat
belts can be activated, where the frontal
collision is severe enough, together with
the air bags.
B210A01NF
1OMG035300
Safety features of your vehicle
163
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
into position. In certain frontal collisions,
the pre-tensioner will activate and pull
the seat belt into tighter contact against
the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive seat belt
tension on the driver or passenger's seat
belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the
load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-
sists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustra-
tion:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
1LDE3100
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seatbelt must be working
correctly and adjusted to the
proper position. Please read and
follow all of the important infor-
mation and precautions about
your vehicle’s occupant safety
features – including seat belts
and air bags – that are provided
in this manual.
2. Be sure you and your passen-
gers always wear seat belts and
wear them properly.
317
Safety features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front passen-
ger's pre-tensioner seat belts will be
activated in certain frontal collisions.
The pre-tensioner seat belts can be
activated where the frontal collision is
severe enough, together with the air
bags.
The pre-tensioners will not be activat-
ed if the seat belts are not being worn
at the time of the collision.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard
and fine dust, which may appear to be
smoke, may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal oper-
ating conditions and are not haz-
ardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should
not be breathed for prolonged peri-
ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-
oughly after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were activat-
ed.
CAUTION
• Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the
SRS air bag warning light on
the instrument panel will illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds
after the ignition key has been
turned to the "ON" position, and
then it should turn off.
• If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not
working properly, this warning
light will illuminate even if there is
no malfunction of the SRS air bag.
If the SRS air bag warning light
does not illuminate when the igni-
tion key is turned to "ON", or if it
remains illuminated after illumi-
nating for approximately 6 sec-
onds, or if it illuminates while the
vehicle is being driven, please
have an authorized Hyundai deal-
er inspect the pre-tensioner seat
belt or SRS air bag system as
soon as possible.
AIR
BAG
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate only one time. After acti-
vation, pre-tensioner seat belts
must be replaced. All seat belts,
of any type, should always be
replaced after they have been
worn during a collision.
• The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat belt
assemblies for several minutes
after they have been activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. This must be done
by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat belt
system in any manner.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
183
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
All 50 states have child restraint laws.You
should be aware of the specific require-
ments in your state. Child and/or infant
seats must be properly placed and
installed in the rear seat. For more infor-
mation about the use of these restraints,
refer to “Child restraint system” in this
section.
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle must
wear their seat belts at all times.
Seat belts and child restraints
reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries for all occupants in the
event of a collision or sudden stop.
Without a seat belt, occupants
could be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the
vehicle. Properly worn seat belts
greatly reduce these hazards.
Even with advanced air bags,
unbelted occupants can be severe-
ly injured by a deploying air bag.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and occu-
pant seating contained in this man-
ual.
(Continued)
• Improper handling of the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt assemblies, and
failure to heed the warnings not
to strike, modify, inspect, replace,
service or repair the pre-tension-
er seat belt assemblies may lead
to improper operation or inadver-
tent activation and serious injury.
• Always wear the seat belts when
driving or riding in a motor vehi-
cle. WARNING
Every person in your vehicle needs
to be properly restrained at all
times, including infants and chil-
dren. Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a vehi-
cle. The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child from
your arms and throw the child
against the interior. Always use a
child restraint appropriate for your
child's height and weight.
319
Safety features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
Small children are best protected from
injury in an accident when properly
restrained in the rear seat by a child
restraint system that meets the require-
ments of the the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. Before buying any
child restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
213. The restraint must be appropriate
for your child's height and weight.
Check the label on the child restraint for
this information. Refer to “Child
restraint system” in this section.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should
be fastened snug on the hips and as low
as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A
child's squirming could put the belt out of
position. Children are afforded the most
safety in the event of an accident when
they are restrained by a proper restraint
system in the rear seat. If a larger child
(over age 13) must be seated in the front
seat, the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoulder
belt and the seat should be placed in the
rearmost position. Children under the
age of 13 should be restrained securely
in the rear seat. NEVER place a child
under the age of 13 in the front seat.
NEVER place a rear facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-
es the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they need to be returned to a
child restraint system.
WARNING - Shoulder belts
on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to be
in contact with a child’s neck or
face while the vehicle is in
motion.
• If seat belts are not properly worn
and adjusted on children, there is
a risk of death or serious injury.
Safety features of your vehicle
203
Pregnant women
The use of a seat belt is recommended
for pregnant women to lessen the chance
of injury in an accident. When a seat belt
is used, the lap belt portion should be
placed as low and snugly as possible on
the hips, not across the abdomen. For
specific recommendations, consult a
physician.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should con-
sult a physician for recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve max-
imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-
tem, all passengers should be sitting up
and the front seats should be in an
upright position when the car is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper protec-
tion if the person is lying down in the rear
seat or if the front seat is in a reclined
position.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be disas-
sembled or modified. In addition, care
should be taken to assure that seat belts
and belt hardware are not damaged by
seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a col-
lision or sudden stop. The protec-
tion of your restraint system (seat
belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seat.
Seat belts must be snug against
your hips and chest to work proper-
ly. The more the seatback is
reclined, the greater the chance
that an occupant's hips will slide
under the lap belt causing serious
internal injuries or the occupant's
neck could strike the shoulder belt.
Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their seats,
properly belted, and with the seat-
backs upright.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after the rear
seatback was folded down, be care-
ful not to damage the seat belt web-
bing or buckle. Be sure that the
webbing or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear seat.
A seat belt with damaged webbing
or buckle will not be as strong and
could possibly fail during a colli-
sion or sudden stop, resulting in
serious injury.
321
Safety features of your vehicle
Periodic inspection
It is recommended that all seat belts be
inspected periodically for wear or dam-
age of any kind. Parts of the system that
are damaged should be replaced as
soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.
If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident.
This should be done even if no damage
is visible. Additional questions concern-
ing seat belt operation should be directed
to an authorized Hyundai dealer.
Children riding in the car should sit in the
rear seat and must always be properly
restrained to minimize the risk of injury in
an accident, sudden stop or sudden
maneuver. According to accident statis-
tics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the
front seat. Larger children not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat belts
provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your state. Child and/or
infant safety seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat. You
must use a commercially available child
restraint system that meets the require-
ments of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured. For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car seat
and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow
all the instructions provided by the man-
ufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
WARNING
• A child restraint system must be
placed in the rear seat. Never
install a child or infant seat on the
front passenger's seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the
passenger side air bag to deploy,
it could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an infant
or child seat. Thus only use a
child restraint in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
• A seat belt or child restraint sys-
tem can become very hot if it is
left in a closed vehicle on a sunny
day, even if the outside tempera-
ture does not feel hot. Be sure to
check the seat cover and buckles
before placing a child there.
• When the child restraint system
is not in use, store it in the trunk
or fasten it with a seat belt so that
it will not be thrown forward in
the case of a sudden stop or an
accident.
• Children may be seriously injured
or killed by an inflating air bag.
All children, even those too large
for child restraints, must ride in
the rear seat.
Safety features of your vehicle
223
(Continued)
• Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle – not even for a short
time. The car can heat up very
quickly, resulting in serious
injuries to children inside. Even
very young children may inadver-
tently cause the vehicle to move,
entangle themselves in the win-
dows, or lock themselves or oth-
ers inside the vehicle.
• Never allow two children, or any
two persons, to use the same
seat belt.
• Children often squirm and repo-
sition themselves improperly.
Never let a child ride with the
shoulder belt under their arm or
behind their back. Always proper-
ly position and secure children in
rear seat.
• Never allow a child to stand-up or
kneel on the seat or floorboard of
a moving vehicle. During a colli-
sion or sudden stop, the child
can be violently thrown against
the vehicles interior, resulting in
serious injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never use an infant carrier or a
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback, it may not pro-
vide adequate security in an acci-
dent.
• Seat belts can become very hot,
especially when the car is parked
in direct sunlight. Always check
seat belt buckles before fasten-
ing them over a child.
• Always store or secure a child
seat, even when it is not in use.
During a collision or sudden
stop, the child seat could be
thrown inside the vehicle.
WARNING
To reduce the chance or serious or
fatal injuries:
• Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passen-
ger seat can be forcefully struck
by an inflating air bag resulting in
serious or fatal injuries.
• Always follow the instructions for
installation and use of the child
restraint maker.
• Always make sure the child seat
is secured properly in the car and
your child is securely restrained
in the child seat.
• Never hold a child in your arms or
lap when riding in a vehicle. The
violent forces created during a
crash will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the car’s interior.
• Never put a seat belt over your-
self and a child. During a crash,
the belt could press deep into the
child causing serious internal
injuries.
(Continued)
323
Safety features of your vehicle
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required. This
child seat or infant seat should be of
appropriate size for the child and should
be installed in accordance with the man-
ufacturer's instructions. It is further
required that the seat be placed in the
vehicle's rear seat.Your vehicle is provid-
ed with child restraint hook holders for
installing the child seat or infant seat.
Placing a passenger seat belt into
the auto lock mode
The use of the auto lock mode will
ensure that the normal movement of the
child in the vehicle does not cause the
seat belt to be pulled out and loosen the
firmness of its hold on the child restraint
system. To secure a child restraint sys-
tem, use the following procedure.
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or center rear seats, do the fol-
lowing:
1. Place the child restraint system in the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, follow-
ing the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure the seat belt web-
bing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
CRS
HNF1008
Rearward-facing child restraint system
Forward-facing child restraint system
E2MS103005 E2BLD310
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not prop-
erly restrained in the child restraint.
Always follow the child seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
Safety features of your vehicle
243
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat
belt all the way out. When the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is fully extend-
ed, it will shift the retractor to the “Auto
Lock” (child restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of
the seat belt to retract and listen for an
audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound.
This indicates that the retractor is in
the “Auto Lock” mode. If no distinct
sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Remove as much slack from the belt
as possible by pushing down on the
child restraint system while feeding the
shoulder belt back into the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat belt is
holding it firmly in place. If it is not,
release the seat belt and repeat steps
2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is in
the “Auto Lock” mode by attempting to
pull more of the seat belt out of the
retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode.
To remove the child restraint, press the
release button on the buckle and then
pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the
restraint and allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
MMSA3028 MMSA3029 MMSA3030
325
Safety features of your vehicle
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position, the
retractor will automatically switch
from the “Auto Lock” mode to the
emergency lock mode for normal
adult usage.
Securing a child restraint seat with
“Tether Anchor” system
Child restraint hook holders are located
on the shelf behind the rear seats.
1. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable headrest,
route the tether strap under the head-
rest and between the headrest posts,
otherwise route the tether strap over
the top of the seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
appropriate child restraint hook holder
and tighten to secure the seat.
WARNING - Auto lock
mode
The lap/shoulder belt automatically
returns to the “emergency lock
mode” whenever the belt is allowed
to retract fully. Therefore, the pre-
ceding seven steps must be fol-
lowed each time a child restraint is
installed.
If the retractor is not in the
Automatic Locking mode, the child
restraint can move when your vehi-
cle turns or stops suddenly. A child
can be seriously injured or killed if
the child restraint is not properly
anchored to the car, including set-
ting the retractor to the Automatic
Locking mode.
2GHA3300
1JBA3052
Safety features of your vehicle
263
WARNING
- Child restraint anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses or
for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
WARNING - Tether strap
• A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly
anchored. Always follow the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
• Never mount more than one child
restraint to a single tether or to a
single lower anchorage point. The
increased load caused by multi-
ple seats may cause the tethers
or anchorage points to break,
causing serious injury or death.
WARNING - Child restraint
check
Check that the child restraint sys-
tem is secure by pushing and
pulling it in different directions.
Incorrectly fitted child restraints
may swing, twist, tip or separate
causing death or serious injury.
WARNING
When using the vehicle's "Tether
Anchor" system to install a child
restraint system in the rear seat, all
unused vehicle rear seat belt metal
latch plates or tabs must be latched
securely in their seat belt buckles
and the seat belt webbing must be
retracted behind the child restraint
to prevent the child from reaching
and taking hold of unretracted seat
belts. Unlatched metal latch plates
or tabs may allow the child to reach
the unretracted seat belts which
may result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the child
in the child restraint.
327
Safety features of your vehicle
Child seat lower anchors
Some child seat manufacturers make
child restraint seats that are labeled as
International Standards Organization
Fixed (ISOFIX) or ISOFIX-compatible
child restraint seats. These seats include
two rigid or webbing mounted attach-
ments that connect to two ISOFIX
anchors at specific seating positions in
your vehicle. This type of child restraint
seat eliminates the need to use seat
belts to attach the child seat in the rear
seats.
ISOFIX anchors have been provided in
your vehicle. The ISOFIX anchors are
located in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Their locations are
shown in the illustration. There is no
ISOFIX anchor provided for the center
rear seating position.
The ISOFIX anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat cush-
ion of the rear seat left and right outboard
seating positions.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with ISOFIX or ISOFIX-
compatible attachments.
Once you have installed the ISOFIX child
restraint, assure that the seat is properly
attached to the ISOFIX and tether
anchors. Also, test the child restraint seat
before you place the child in it. Tilt the
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the
seat forward. Check to see if the anchors
hold the seat in place.
B230D01NF B230D03NF
WARNING
When using the vehicle's "ISOFIX"
system to install a child restraint
system in the rear seat, all unused
vehicle rear seat belt metal latch
plates or tabs must be latched
securely in their seat belt buckles
and the seat belt webbing must be
retracted behind the child restraint
to prevent the child from reaching
and taking hold of unretracted seat
belts. Unlatched metal latch plates
or tabs may allow the child to reach
the unretracted seat belts which
may result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the child
in the child restraint.
Safety features of your vehicle
283
WARNING - ISOFIX
Anchors
• A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly
anchored. Always follow the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
• Never install a child restraint
using the ISOFIX anchors at the
center position of the rear seat. In
a crash, the ISOFIX anchors may
break if a car seat is improperly
placed in the center position
resulting in serious or fatal
injuries. Only place a ISOFIX or
ISOFIX-compatible child seat in
the left or right out-board rear
seating positions (as shown) to
the appropriate ISOFIX anchors
provided.
• Never mount more than one child
restraint to a single tether or to a
single lower anchorage point. The
increased load caused by multi-
ple seats may cause the tethers
or anchorage points to break,
causing serious injury or death.
WARNING
Install the child restraint seat fully
rearward against the seatback with
the seatback in a vertical position,
not reclined.
329
Safety features of your vehicle
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Driver’s air bag Front passenger’s
air bag
* : if equipped
Curtain Air bag*
SRS control module
OHD036026/OHD036023/OHD036024/OUN026109/OUN026110/OHD036125/OHD036030/OHD036029/OVQ036096N/OVQ036095N/OHD036028
Occupant classi-
fication system
Driver seat position
sensor
Side impact sensor* Front impact sensor
Side impact air bag*
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
66
9
7
8
Safety features of your vehicle
303
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following com-
ponents:
1. Front Impact Sensors
2. “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”
Indicator (Front passenger’s seat only)
3. SRS "AIR BAG" warning light
4. Passenger's Air bag Module
5. Driver's Air Bag Module
6. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)
7. Occupant Classification System
(Front passenger's seat only)
8. Driver's Seat Track Position Sensor
9. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat
Belt Buckle Sensors
10. Side Impact Sensors*
11. Retractor Pre-tensioner Assemblies
12. Side Air Bag Modules*
13. Curtain Air bag Modules*
* : If equipped
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require air
bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
The SRS AIR BAG warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for about
6 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, after which the
AIR BAG warning light should go out.
If any of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunetion of the SRS.
Have an authorized Hyundai dealer
inspect the air bag system as soon as
possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
The air bag modules are located both in
the center of the steering wheel and in
the front passenger's panel above the
glove box. When the SRSCM detects a
sufficiently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically deploy
the front air bags.
B240B01L
Driver’s front air bag (1)
331
Safety features of your vehicle
B240B05L
Passenger’s front air bag
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will separate
under pressure from the expansion of the
air bags. Further opening of the covers
then allows full inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination
with a properly worn seat belt, slows the
driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, reducing the risk of head and
chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling the
driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to steer or operate other con-
trols.
B240B02L B240B03L
Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)
WARNING
• Do not install or place any acces-
sories (drink holder, cassette
holder, sticker, etc.) on the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box in a vehicle with a pas-
senger's air bag. Such objects
may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
• When installing a container of liq-
uid air freshener inside the vehi-
cle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the
instrument panel surface.
It may become a dangerous pro-
jectile and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
Safety features of your vehicle
323
Occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with an occu-
pant classification system in the front
passenger's seat.
The occupant classification system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air bag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
The driver's front air bag is not affected
or controlled by the occupant classifica-
tion system.
WARNING
• If an air bag deploys, there may
be a loud noise followed by a fine
dust released in the vehicle.
These conditions are normal and
are not hazardous - the air bags
are packed in this fine powder.
The dust generated during air
bag deployment may cause skin
or eye irritation as well as aggra-
vate asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition key is in the "ON"
position. If the SRS "AIR BAG"
warning light does not illuminate,
or continuously remains on after
illuminating for about 6 seconds
when the ignition key is turned to
the ON position, or after the
engine is started, comes on while
driving, the SRS is not working
properly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle immediately inspected by
an authorized Hyundai dealer.
• Before you replace a fuse or dis-
connect a battery terminal, turn
the ignition key to the LOCK
position and remove the ignition
key. Never remove or replace the
air bag related fuse(s) when the
ignition key is in the ON position.
Failure to heed this warning will
cause the SRS AIR BAG warning
light to illuminate.
OHD036012N
333
Safety features of your vehicle
If the front passenger seat is occupied by
a person that the system determines to
be of adult size, and he/she sits properly
(sitting upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the seat
cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-
fortably extended and their feet on the
floor), the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator will be turned off and the front
passenger's air bag will be able to inflate,
if necessary, in frontal crashes.
You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator on the center facia panel.
This system detects the conditions 1~4
in the following table and activates or
deactivates the front passenger air bag
based on these conditions.
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
Condition
detected by the
occupant classi-
fication system
1. Adult *1
2. Child*2or
child restraint
system*3
3. Unoccupied
4. There is a
malfunction
in the system
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Activated
"PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF"
indicator light
SRS warning
light
Front passen-
ger air bag
Activated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
Side air bag
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Curtain air bag
Indicator/Warning light Devices
*1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending
on his/her physique and posture.
*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who
has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system
may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
*3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
WARNING
Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger's
seat when it is unoccupied by a passenger adversely affects the occupant
classification system (OCS).
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
343
1KMN3663
1KMN3664
1KMN3665
- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
- Never lean on the center console.
- Never sit on one side of the front
passenger seat.
- Never place feet on the dash-
board.
OVQ036013N
1KMN3662
- Never put a heavy load in the
front passenger seat or seatback
pocket.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
OVQ036014N
- Never place feet on the front pas-
senger seatback.
(Continued)
335
Safety features of your vehicle
When an adult is seated in the front pas-
senger seat, if the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator is on, turn the igni-
tion key to "LOCK" and ask the passen-
ger to sit properly (sitting upright with the
seat back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat belt
on, legs comfortably extended and their
feet on the floor). Restart the engine and
have the person remain in that position.
This will allow the system to detect the
person and to enable the passenger air
bag.
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-
cator is still on, ask the passenger to
move to the rear seat.
✽✽NOTICE
The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the ignition key is turned to
the "ON" position or after the engine is
started. If the front passenger seat is
occupied, the occupant classification
sensor will then classify the front pas-
senger after several more seconds.
B990A01O
Proper position
WARNING
Do not allow an adult passenger to
ride in the front seat when the
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator is illuminated, because the air
bag will not deploy in the event of a
crash. If the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator remains illumi-
nated after the passenger reposi-
tions themselves properly and the
car is restarted, we recommend
that passenger move to the rear
seat because the passenger's front
air bag will not deploy.
Front seat passengers must stay
properly seated to avoid serious
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING
Do not put a heavy load in the front
passenger seatback pocket or on
the front passenger seat. Do not
hang onto the front passenger seat.
Do not hang any items such as
seatback table on the front passen-
ger seatback. Do not place feet on
the front passenger seatback. Do
not place any items under the front
passenger seat. Any of these could
interfere with proper sensor opera-
tion.
Safety features of your vehicle
363
WARNING
If the occupant classification sys-
tem is not working properly, the
SRS air bag warning light on
the instrument panel will illuminate
because the passenger's front air
bag is connected with the occupant
classification system. If there is a
malfunction of the occupant classi-
fication system, the "PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF" indicator will not
illuminate and the passenger's
front air bag will inflate in frontal
impact crashes even if there is no
occupant in the front passenger's
seat. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate when the
ignition key is turned to the "ON"
position, remains illuminated after
approximately 6 seconds when the
ignition key is turned to the "ON"
position, or if it illuminates while
the vehicle is being driven, have an
authorized Hyundai dealer inspect
the occupant classification system
and the SRS air bag system as
soon as possible.
(Continued)
• Do not modify or replace the front
passenger seat. Don't place any-
thing on or attach anything such
as a blanket or after market seat
heater to the front passenger
seat.This can adversely affect the
occupant classification system.
• Do not sit on sharp objects such
as tools when occupying the
front passenger seat. This can
adversely affect the occupant
classification system.
• Do not use accessory seat cov-
ers on the front seats.
(Continued)
WARNING
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant clas-
sification system, never install a
child restraint system in the front
passenger's seat. A deploying air
bag can forcefully strike a child
resulting in serious injuries or
death. Any child age 12 and
under should ride in the rear seat.
Children too large for child
restraints should use the avail-
able lap/shoulder belts. No mat-
ter what type of crash, children of
all ages are safer when restrained
in the rear seat.
• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator is illuminated
when the front passenger's seat
is occupied by an adult and
he/she sits properly (sitting
upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the
seat cushion with their seat belt
on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor), have
that person sit in the rear seat.
(Continued)
337
Safety features of your vehicle
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag)
System. The indications of the system's
presence are the letters "SRS AIR BAG"
embossed on the air bag pad cover in the
steering wheel and the passenger's side
front panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags installed
under the pad covers in the center of the
steering wheel and the passenger's side
front panel above the glove box.
OHD036023
Driver’s front air bag
(Continued)
• Accident statistics show that
children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear, as opposed
to the front seat. It is recom-
mended that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including
an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a for-
ward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster
seat.
• Air bags can only be used once –
have an authorized Hyundai deal-
er replace the air bag immediate-
ly after deployment.
• A smaller-stature adult who is not
seated correctly (for example:
seat excessively reclined, leaning
on the center console, or hips
shifted forward in the seat) can
cause a condition where the
advanced frontal air bag system
senses less weight than if the
occupant were seated properly
(sitting upright with the seatback
in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their
seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the
floor).
(Continued)
(Continued)
This condition can result in an
adult potentially being misclassi-
fied and illumination of the "PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG OFF" indica-
tor.
Safety features of your vehicle
383
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-
ger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt system alone in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient
severity. The SRS uses sensors to gath-
er information about the driver's seat
position, the driver's and front passen-
ger's seat belt usage and impact severi-
ty.
The driver's seat track position sensors,
which are installed on the seat track,
determine if the seat is fore or aft of a ref-
erence position. The seat belt buckle
sensors determine if the driver and front
passenger's seat belts are fastened.
These sensors provide the ability to con-
trol the SRS deployment based on how
close the driver's seat is to the steering
wheel, whether or not the seat belts are
fastened, and how severe the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability to
control the air bag inflation with two lev-
els. A first stage level is provided for mod-
erate-severity impacts. A second stage
level is provided for more severe impacts.
According to the impact severity, seating
position and seat belt usage, the
SRSCM(SRS Control Module) controls
the air bag inflation. Failure to properly
wear seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant classification system in
the front passenger's seat. The occupant
classification system detects the pres-
ence of a passenger in the front passen-
ger's seat and will turn off the front pas-
senger's air bag under certain condi-
tions. For more detail, see "Occupant
Classification System" in this section.
OHD036024
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING
If a seat track position sensor or an
occupant classification system is
not working properly, the SRS air
bag warning light on the instru-
ment panel will illuminate because
the SRS air bag warning light is
connected with the seat track posi-
tion sensor and the occupant clas-
sification system. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition key is turned to
the "ON" position, remains illumi-
nated after approximately 6 sec-
onds when the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position, or if it
illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, have an authorized
Hyundai dealer inspect the
advanced SRS air bag system as
soon as possible.
AIR
BAG
339
Safety features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
• Be sure to read information about the
SRS on the labels provided on the sun
visor and in the glove box.
• Advanced air bags are combined with
pre-tensioner seat belts to help pro-
vide enhanced occupant protection in
frontal crashes. Front air bags are not
intended to deploy in collisions in
which sufficient protection can be
provided by the pre-tensioner seat
belt.
• If you are considering modification of
your vehicle due to a disability, please
contact the Hyundai Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-633-5151.
WARNING
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every time,
everyone! Air bags inflate with
considerable force and in the blink
of an eye. Seat belts help keep
occupants in proper position to
obtain maximum benefit from the
air bag. Even with advanced air
bags, improperly and unbelted
occupants can be severely injured
when the air bag inflates. Always
follow the precautions about seat
belts, air bags and occupant safety
contained in this manual.
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries and receive the maxi-
mum safety benefit from your
restraint system:
• Never place a child in any child or
booster seat in the front seat.
• ABC – Always Buckle Children in
the back seat. It is the safest
place for children of any age to
ride.
• Front and side air bags can injure
occupants improperly positioned
in the front seats.
(Continued)
WARNING
• Modification to the seat structure
can adversely affect the seat
track position sensor and cause
the air bag to deploy at a different
level than should be provided.
• Do not place any objects under-
neath the front seats as they
could damage the seat track
position sensor or interfere with
the occupant classification sys-
tem.
• Do not place any objects that may
cause magnetic fields near the
front seat. These may cause a
malfunction of the seat track
position sensor.
Safety features of your vehicle
403
(Continued)
• Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air bags,
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
• You and your passengers should
never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags. Improperly
positioned drivers and passen-
gers can be severely injured by
inflating air bags.
• Never lean against the door or
center console – always sit in an
upright position.
• Do not allow a passenger to ride
in the front seat when the “PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator
is illuminated, because the air
bag will not deploy in the event of
a moderate or severe frontal
crash.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.
• Never place covers, blankets or
aftermarket seat warmers on the
passenger seat as these may
interfere with the occupant clas-
sification system.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental deployment of the air bags
or by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If the SRS air bag warning light
remains illuminated while the
vehicle is being driven, have an
authorized Hyundai dealer
inspect the air bag system as
soon as possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Air bags can only be used once –
have an authorized Hyundai deal-
er replace the air bag immediate-
ly after deployment.
• The SRS is designed to deploy
the front air bags only when an
impact is sufficiently severe and
when the impact angle is less
than 30° from the forward longitu-
dinal axis of the vehicle.
Additionally, the air bags will only
deploy once. Seat belts must be
worn at all times.
• Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-
impact or rollover crashes. In
addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below
the deployment threshold.
(Continued)
341
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can result in serious or fatal
injury in a crash. All occupants
should sit upright with the seat
back in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and their feet on
the floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
• The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an occu-
pant is out of position because of
not wearing a seat belt, the air
bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal
injuries.
(Continued)
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant clas-
sification system, do not install a
child restraint system in the front
passenger seat position. A child
restraint system must never be
placed in the front seat.The infant
or child could be severely injured
or killed by an air bag deployment
in case of an accident.
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow chil-
dren to ride in the front passen-
ger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he or
she must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
• For maximum safety protection in
all types of crashes, all occu-
pants including the driver should
always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position
to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a
crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-
sarily close to the air bag while
the vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)
1VQA2087
1JBA3514
1JBA3522
Rear impact
Side impact
Rollover
Safety features of your vehicle
423
Side air bag (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a side air
bag in each front seat. The purpose of
the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driv-
er and/or the front passenger with addi-
tional protection than that offered by the
seat belt alone.
The side air bags are designed to deploy
only during certain side-impact collisions,
depending on the crash severity, angle,
speed and point of impact. The side air
bags are not designed to deploy in all
side impact situations.
OUN026109/OUN026110
B990B02LZ
WARNING
• The side air bag is supplemental
to the driver's and the passen-
ger's seat belt systems and is not
a substitute for them. Therefore
your seat belts must be worn at
all times while the vehicle is in
motion. The air bags deploy only
in certain side impact conditions
severe enough to cause signifi-
cant injury to the vehicle occu-
pants.
• For best protection from the side
air bag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side air
bag, both front seat occupants
should sit in an upright position
with the seat belt properly fas-
tened. The driver's hands should
be placed on the steering wheel
at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions.
The passenger's arms and hands
should be placed on their laps.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use any accessory seat
covers.
• Use of seat covers could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness of
the system.
• Do not install any accessories on
the side or near the side air bag.
• Do not place any objects over the
air bag or between the air bag
and yourself.
• Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles and cause
injury if the supplemental side air
bag inflates.
• To prevent unexpected deploy-
ment of the side air bag that may
result in personal injury, avoid
impact to the side impact sensor
when the ignition key is on.
• If seat or seat cover is damaged,
have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized
Hyundai dealer. Inform them that
your vehicle is equipped with
side air bags and an occupant
classification system.
343
Safety features of your vehicle
Curtain air bag (if equipped)
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and
the rear outboard seat occupants in cer-
tain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash sever-
ity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain
air bags are not designed to deploy in all
side impact situations, collisions from the
front or rear of the vehicle or in most
rollover situations.
WARNING
• In order for side and curtain air
bags to provide the best protec-
tion, both front seat occupants
and both outboard rear occu-
pants should sit in an upright
position with the seat belts prop-
erly fastened. Importantly, chil-
dren should sit in a proper child
restraint system in the rear seat.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats, they must be
seated in the proper child
restraint system. Make sure to
put the child restraint system as
far away from the door side as
possible, and secure the child
restraint system in a locked posi-
tion.
(Continued)
OHD036125
OUN026090
(Continued)
• Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passen-
gers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or
curtain air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain
air bag system. This should only
be done by an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
Failure to follow the above men-
tioned instructions can result in
injury or death to the vehicle occu-
pants in an accident.
Safety features of your vehicle
443
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be expect-
ed to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts. In other words, just because
your vehicle is damaged and even if it
is totally unusable, don’t be surprised
that the air bags did not inflate.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor (if equipped)
OHD036026/OHD036028/OHD036029/OHD036030
345
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bag
Front air bags are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the intensi-
ty, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision - generally from an area a little
to the left to a little to the right of straight
ahead.
1JBA3513
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air
bags or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal injury
or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should,
causing severe injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the
front bumper, body or B pillar
where side collision sensors are
installed. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
• Your vehicle has been designed
to absorb impact and deploy the
air bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing aftermarket bumper
guards or replacing a bumper
with non-genuine parts may
adversely affect your vehicle’s
collision and air bag deployment
performance.
Safety features of your vehicle
463
Side and/or air bags (if equipped)
Side and/or curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a side
impact collision.
Although the front air bags (driver’s and
front passenger’s air bags) are designed
to inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of colli-
sions if the front impact sensors detect a
sufficient impact. Side air bags (side
and/or curtain air bags) are designed to
inflate only in side impact collisions, but
they may inflate in other collisions if the
side impact sensors detect a sufficient
impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads
or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on sur-
faces not designed for vehicle traffic to
prevent unintended air bag deployment.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags are
designed not to deploy in such cases
because they may not provide benefits
beyond the protection of the seat belts
in such collisions.
1JBA3515
1JBA3516
OUN026090
347
Safety features of your vehicle
• Frontal air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because occu-
pants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case, inflat-
ed air bags would not be able to pro-
vide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag
deployment would not provide addi-
tional occupant protection.
However, side or curtain air bags may
inflate depending on the intensity, vehi-
cle speed and angles of impact.
• In a slant or angled collision, the force
of impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would not
be able to provide any additional bene-
fit, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
1VQA2087 1JBA35211JBA3516
Safety features of your vehicle
483
• Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be signifi-
cantly reduced by such “under-ride”
collisions.
• Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci-
dents because air bag deployment
would not provide protection to the
occupants.
However, side and/or curtain air bags
may inflate when the vehicle is rolled
over by a side impact collision, if the
vehicle is equipped with side air bags
and curtain air bags.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not deliv-
ered to the sensors.
1JBA3517 1JBA3522 1JBA3518
349
Safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if
necessary) only when the ignition
switch is turned to ON or START posi-
tion.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of
a serious frontal or side collision (if
equipped with side air bag or curtain
air bag) in order to help protect the
occupants from serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which the
air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate by the severity of a collision and
its direction. These two factors deter-
mine whether the sensors send out an
electronic deployment/inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the densi-
ty and stiffness of the vehicles or
objects which your vehicle hits in the
collision. Though, factors are not limit-
ed to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident.
It is much more likely that you will sim-
ply see the deflated air bags hanging
out of their storage compartments after
the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag
inflation is a consequence of the
extremely short time in which a collision
occurs and the need to get the air bag
between the occupant and the vehicle
structures before the occupant impacts
those structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-
threatening injuries in a severe collision
and is thus a necessary part of air bag
design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which normally can
include facial abrasions, bruises and
broken bones, and sometimes more
severe injuries because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the steer-
ing wheel air bag can cause fatal
injuries, especially if the occupant
is positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel.
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal injury
or death caused by deploying air
bags in a collision, the driver
should sit as far back from the
steering wheel air bag as possi-
ble (at least 10 inches (250 mm)
away). The front passenger
should always move their seat as
far back as possible and sit back
in their seat.
• Air bag inflates instantly in the
event of collision, and passen-
gers may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not in
proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries which normally include
facial or bodily abrasions,
injuries from broken glasses or
burns by the air bag inflation
gasses.
Safety features of your vehicle
503
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the igni-
tion of the air bag inflator. After the air
bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-
comfort in breathing due to the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. We strongly urge
you to open your doors and/or win-
dows as soon as possible after impact
in order to reduce discomfort and pre-
vent prolonged exposure to the
smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes, nose and throat etc). If this is the
case, wash and rinse with cold water
immediately and consult a doctor if the
symptom persists.
Installing a child restraint on a front
passenger’s seat is forbidden
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-
ing child restraint, causing serious or
fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s seat
either. If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause serious or fatal
injuries to the child.
1JBH3051
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the air
bag related parts in the steering
wheel and/or instrument panel
and/or in both sides of the roof rails
above the front and rear doors are
very hot. To prevent injury, do not
touch the air bag storage area’s
internal components immediately
after an air bag has inflated.
351
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag warning light
The purpose of air bag warning light in
your instrument panel is to alert you of a
potential problem with your air bag -
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the indicator light should illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
WARNING
• Never put a child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. If the front
passenger air bag inflates, it
would cause serious or fatal
injuries.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of vehicle
equipped with curtain air bag, be
sure to install the child restraint
system as far away from the door
side as possible, and secure the
child restraint system to be
locked in position.
Inflation of side or curtain air bag
could cause serious injury or
death due to the expansion
impact.
AIR
BAG
Safety features of your vehicle
523
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and so there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself. If the SRS "AIR BAG"
warning light does not illuminate, or con-
tinuously remains on, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such as
removing, installing, repairing, or any
work on the steering wheel must be per-
formed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
Improper handling of the SRS system
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING
• Do not install a child restraint
system in the front passenger
seat position. A child restraint
system must never be placed in
the front seat. The infant or child
could be severely injured by an
air bag deployment in case of an
accident.
• Modification to SRS components
or wiring, including the addition
of any kind of badges to the pad
covers or modifications to the
body structure, can adversely
affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
one which has been moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect
the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the air bags inflate, they must
be replaced by an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring, or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental inflation of the air bags or
by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If components of the air bag sys-
tem must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, certain
safety precautions must be
observed. An authorized Hyundai
dealer knows these precautions
and can give you the necessary
information. Failure to follow
these precautions and proce-
dures could increase the risk of
personal injury.
• If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or water on
flooring, you shouldn't try to start
the engine; have the car towed to
an authorized Hyundai dealer.
353
Safety features of your vehicle
Additional safety precautions
•Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat. All occupants should
sit upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor.
•Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not wear-
ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-
gency stop can be thrown against the
inside of the vehicle, against other
occupants, or out of the vehicle.
•Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more than
one person uses the same seat belt,
they could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
•Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the seat
belt can reduce the protection provided
by the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
•Passengers should not place hard
or sharp objects between them-
selves and the air bags. Carrying
hard or sharp objects on your lap or in
your mouth can result in injuries if an
air bag inflates.
•Keep occupants away from the air
bag covers. All occupants should sit
upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor. If occupants are too close to the
air bag covers, they could be injured if
the air bags inflate.
•Do not attach or place objects on or
near the air bag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the front or
side air bag covers could interfere with
the proper operation of the air bags.
•Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the sup-
plemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
•Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation
of the supplemental restraint system
sensing components and wiring har-
nesses.
•Never hold an infant or child on your
lap. The infant or child could be seri-
ously injured or killed in the event of a
crash. All infants and children should
be properly restrained in appropriate
child safety seats or seat belts in the
rear seat.
Adding equipment to or modify-
ing your air bag-equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
WARNING
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can cause occupants to be
shifted too close to a deploying
air bag, strike the interior struc-
ture or be thrown from the vehicle
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always sit upright with the seat-
back in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with
your seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and your feet on
the floor.
Safety features of your vehicle
543
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels, some required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to alert
the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.
OHD036027/OHD036117L/OHD036121L/OHD036122L
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
1
2
3
4
Keys / 4-2
Remote keyless entry / 4-3
Theft-alarm system / 4-6
Door locks / 4-8
Trunk / 4-12
Windows / 4-14
Hood / 4-18
Fuel filler lid / 4-20
Sunroof / 4-23
Steering wheel / 4-28
Mirrors / 4-30
Instrument cluster / 4-38
Hazard warning flasher / 4-51
Lighting / 4-51
Wipers and washers / 4-54
Interior light / 4-56
Defroster / 4-59
Manual climate control system / 4-60
Automatic climate control system / 4-69
Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-77
Storage compartment / 4-80
Interior features / 4-82
Audio system / 4-87
Features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
24
Record your key number
The key code number is stamped on the
bar code tag attached to the key set.
Should you lose your keys, this number
will enable an authorized Hyundai dealer
to duplicate the keys easily. Remove the
bar code tag and store it in a safe place.
Also, record the code number and keep it
in a safe and handy place, but not in the
vehicle.
Key operations
Used to start the engine, lock and unlock
the doors.
KEYS
WARNING - Ignition key
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with the ignition key is dan-
gerous even if the key is not in the
ignition. Children copy adults and
they could place the key in the igni-
tion. The ignition key would enable
children to operate power windows
or other controls, or even make the
vehicle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or even death.
Never leave the keys in your vehicle
with unsupervised children.
OHD046100L OHD046101L
WARNING
Use only Hyundai original parts for
the ignition key in your vehicle. If
an aftermarket key is used, the igni-
tion switch may not return to ON
after START. If this happens, the
starter will continue to operate
causing damage to the starter
motor and possible fire due to
excessive current in the wiring.
43
Features of your vehicle
Remote keyless entry system
operations
Lock (1)
All doors are locked if the lock button is
pressed.
If all doors are closed, the hazard warn-
ing lights blink once to indicate that all
doors are locked. However, if any door
remains open, the hazard warning lights
don’t blink. After this, if all doors are
closed, the hazard warning lights blink.
Unlock (2)
Driver's door is unlocked if the unlock
button is pressed once.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
to indicate that the driver's door is
unlocked.
All doors are unlocked if the unlock but-
ton is pressed twice within 4 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
again to indicate that all doors are
unlocked.
After depressing this button, the doors
will be locked automatically unless you
open any door within 30 seconds.
Trunk lid open (3)
The trunk lid opens if this button is
pressed more than 0.5 second.
Alarm (4)
The horn sounds and hazard warning
lights flash for about 30 seconds if this
button is pressed. To stop the horn and
lights, press any button on the transmit-
ter.
Transmitter precautions
✽✽NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any of
following occur:
• The ignition key is in ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 30 feet [10 m]).
• The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the ignition key. If you have a problem
with the transmitter, contact an author-
ized Hyundai dealer.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
OHD046102N
Features of your vehicle
44
Operational distance may vary depend-
ing upon the area the transmitter is used
in. For example, if the vehicle is parked
near police stations, government and
public offices, broadcasting stations, mil-
itary installations, airports, or transmit-
ting towers, etc.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Battery replacement
Transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium battery
which will normally last for several years.
When replacement is necessary, use the
following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-
tly pry open the transmitter center
cover (1).
2. Replace the battery with new one.
When replacing the battery, make sure
the battery positive “+” symbol faces
up as indicated in the illustration.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
For replacement transmitters, see an
authorized Hyundai dealer for repro-
gramming.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er vehicle warranty.
OHD046103
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
45
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
The keyless entry system transmit-
ter is designed to give you years of
trouble-free use, however it can
malfunction if exposed to moisture
or static electricity. If you are
unsure how to use your transmitter
or replace the battery, contact an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
CAUTION
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter to malfunc-
tion. Be sure to use the correct
battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmit-
ter, don't drop it, get it wet, or
expose it to heat or sunlight.
Features of your vehicle
64
This system is designed to provide pro-
tection from unauthorized entry into the
car. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the
second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and
the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-
gered, the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard warning
lights.
Armed stage
Park the car and stop the engine. Arm
the system as described below.
1. Remove the ignition key from the igni-
tion switch.
2. Make sure that all doors, the engine
hood and trunk lid are closed and
latched.
3. Lock the doors using the transmitter of
the keyless entry system.
After completion of the steps above, the
hazard warning lights will blink once to
indicate that the system is armed.
If any door, trunk lid or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warning lights
won’t operate and theft-alarm will not
arm. After this, if all doors, trunk lid and
engine hood are closed, the hazard
warning lights blink once.
The system can be armed by locking the
doors with the key from the front doors or
trunk lid. However, the hazard warning
lights are not operated.
Do not arm the system until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
system is armed while a passenger(s)
remains in the vehicle, the alarm may
be activated when the remaining pas-
senger(s) leave the vehicle. If any
door, trunk lid or engine hood is
opened within 30 seconds after enter-
ing the armed stage, the system is
disarmed to prevent unnecessary
alarm.
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
47
Features of your vehicle
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs while the system is
armed.
• A front or rear door is opened without
using the ignition key or transmitter.
• The trunk lid is opened without using
the ignition key or transmitter.
• The engine hood is opened.
The siren will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously for
27 seconds, and repeat the alarm 3
times unless the system is disarmed. To
turn off the system, unlock the doors with
the ignition key or transmitter.
Withheld alarm
If the trunk lid is opened with the trans-
mitter during the armed stage, the alarm
will not be activated but the armed state
will be maintained for the doors and
hood.
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when the
doors are unlocked by depressing the
unlock button on the transmitter or
unlocked with the ignition key.
After depressing unlock button, the haz-
ard warning lights will blink twice to indi-
cate that the system is disarmed.
After depressing unlock button, if any
door is not opened within 30 seconds,
the system will be rearmed.
✽✽NOTICE
• Avoid trying to start the engine while
the alarm is activated. The vehicle
starting motor is disabled during the
theft-alarm stage. If the system is not
disarmed with the ignition key or
transmitter, insert the key into the
ignition switch, turn the ignition
switch to the ON position and wait for
30 seconds. Then the system will be
disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized Hyundai dealer.
Features of your vehicle
84
Operating door locks from out-
side the vehicle
• Turn the key toward rear of vehicle to
unlock and toward front of vehicle to
lock.
• If you lock/unlock the door with a key,
all vehicle doors will lock/unlock auto-
matically.
• From the driver’s door, turn the key to
the right once to unlock the driver’s
door and once more within 4 seconds
to unlock all doors. (if equipped)
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter key (if
equipped).
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
✽✽NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock and
door mechanisms may not work proper-
ly due to freezing conditions.
✽✽NOTICE
If the door is locked/unlocked multiple
times in rapid succession with either the
vehicle key or door lock switch, the sys-
tem may stop operating temporarily in
order to protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
• To lock a door without the key, push the
inside door lock button (1) or central
door lock switch (2) (if equipped) to the
“Lock” position and close the door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch, all vehicle doors will
lock automatically. (if equipped)
✽✽NOTICE
Always remove the ignition key, engage
the parking brake, close all windows
and lock all doors when leaving your
vehicle unattended.
DOOR LOCKS
OHD046001
Lock
Unlock
OHD046002
49
Features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The
red mark (2) on the button will be visi-
ble.
• To lock a door, push the door lock but-
ton (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door
is locked properly, the red mark (2) on
the door lock button will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the front
door is pulled when the door lock but-
ton is in lock position, the button is
unlocked and door opens. (if equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch and
any front door is open.
With central door lock switch (if
equipped)
It is operated by depressing the door lock
switch. If the “Lock” position is switched
when any door is open, the door will
remain locked when closed.
OHD046003
Lock
Unlock
WARNING - Door lock mal-
function
If a power door lock ever fails to
function while you are in the vehi-
cle, try one or more of the following
techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from out-
side.
OHD046004
Driver’s door
Features of your vehicle
104
• When pushing down on the front por-
tion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will lock.
• When pushing down on the rear por-
tion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will unlock.
• However, if the key is in the ignition
switch and any front door is open, the
doors will not lock when the front por-
tion of central door lock switch is
pressed.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can
invite theft or possible harm to you
or others from someone hiding in
your vehicle while you are gone.
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended chil-
dren or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle. Furthermore, children
might operate features of the vehi-
cle that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm, possi-
bly from someone gaining entry to
the vehicle. Never leave children or
animals unattended in your vehicle.
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be fully
closed and locked while the vehi-
cle is in motion to prevent acci-
dental opening of the door.
Locked doors will also discour-
age potential intruders when the
vehicle stops or slows.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcy-
cles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a door
when something is approaching
can cause damage or injury.
411
Features of your vehicle
Impact sensing door unlock sys-
tem (if equipped)
All doors will be automatically unlocked
when the impact is delivered to impact
sensors while the ignition switch ON.
However, the doors may not be unlocked
when there are some problems of
mechanical door lock system or battery.
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
When the speed of the vehicle is above
approximately 12 MPH (20 km/h) for 1
second, it will automatically lock all
doors. For activation of this feature, con-
tact an authorized Hyundai dealer.
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally open-
ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in the vehi-
cle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock located on
the rear edge of the door to the “Lock”
position. When the child safety lock is
in the “Lock ( )” position, rear door
will not open even though the inner
door handle is pulled inside the vehi-
cle.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle (1).
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle (2) until rear door child
safety lock is unlocked ( ).
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out and be
severely injured or killed. To pre-
vent children from opening the rear
doors from the inside, the rear door
safety locks should be used when-
ever children are in the vehicle.
OHD046005
Features of your vehicle
124
Opening the trunk
With remote trunk lid release
To open the trunk lid without using the
key, push the trunk lid release button.
With the key
To open the trunk lid, insert the key and
turn it clockwise to unlock. The trunk
compartment light will illuminate when
the trunk lid is opened.
Closing the trunk
To close, lower the trunk lid, then press
down on it until it locks. To be sure the
trunk lid is securely fastened, always
check by trying to pull it up.
TRUNK
OHD046007 OHD046006
WARNING
The trunk lid should be always kept
completely closed while the vehicle
is in motion. If it is left open or ajar,
poisonous exhaust gases may
enter the car and serious illness or
death may result. See additional
warnings concerning exhaust
gases in section 5, “Engine exhaust
can be dangerous!”.
413
Features of your vehicle
Emergency trunk safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with an emer-
gency trunk release cable located inside
the trunk. The lever glows in the dark
when the trunk lid is closed. If someone
is inadvertently locked in the trunk,
pulling this handle will release the trunk
latch mechanism and open the trunk.
WARNING
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the trunk of the vehicle at
any time. If the trunk is partially
or totally latched and the person
is unable to get out, severe injury
or death could occur due to lack
of ventilation, exhaust fumes and
rapid heat build-up, or because of
exposure to cold weather condi-
tions. The trunk is also a highly
dangerous location in the event
of a crash because it is not a pro-
tected occupant space but mere-
ly a part of the vehicle’s crush
zone.
• Your vehicle should be kept
locked and keys be kept out of
the reach of children. Parents
should teach their children about
the dangers of playing in trunks.
OHD046008
Features of your vehicle
144
Power windows (if equipped)
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power win-
dow switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window up*/down*
(Driver’s window)
(7) Power window lock switch
*: if equipped
✽✽NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
WINDOWS
OHD046009
415
Features of your vehicle
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls the door’s window. However,
the driver has a power window lock
switch which can block the operation of
passenger windows.
The power windows can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the igni-
tion key is removed or turned to the ACC
or LOCK position. However, if the front
doors are opened, the power windows
cannot be operated even within the 30
seconds after the ignition key removal.
While driving, if you notice buffeting and
pulsation (wind shock) with either side
window open, you should open the oppo-
site window slightly to reduce the condi-
tion.
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the win-
dows in the vehicle.
• To open or close a window, press down
or pull up the front portion of the corre-
sponding switch to the first detent posi-
tion (5).
Auto down window (if equipped)
(driver’s window)
Depressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent posi-
tion (6) completely lowers the driver’s
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up the switch momentarily
to the opposite direction of the window
movement.
(Continued)
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposing directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
WARNING - Windows
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head and
other obstructions are safely out
of the way before closing a win-
dow.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Keep the dri-
ver’s door power window lock
switch in the LOCK position
(depressed). Serious injury can
result from unintentional window
operation by the child.
• Do not extend face or arms out-
side through the window opening
while driving.
CAUTION
• To prevent the power window
system from the possibility of
damage, do not open or close two
windows at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
164
Auto up/down window (if equipped)
(Driver's window)
Depressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the second
detent position (6) completely lowers or
lifts the window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up or depress and release
the switch to the opposite direction of the
movement.
If the power window is not operating cor-
rectly, the automatic power window sys-
tem must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
2. Close driver’s window and continue
pulling up on driver’s power window
switch for at least 1 second after the
window is completely closed.
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the driver’s
window is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward move-
ment. The window will then lower approx-
imately 12 in. (30 cm) to allow the object
to be cleared.
If the window detects resistance while
the power window switch is pulled up
continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower approxi-
mately 1in. (2.5cm). If the power window
switch is pulled up continuously again
within 5 seconds after the window is low-
ered by the automatic window reversal
feature, the automatic window reversal
will not operate.
WARNING
• The automatic reverse feature for
the driver’s window is only active
when the “auto up” feature is
used by fully pulling up the
switch. The automatic reverse
feature will not operate if the win-
dow is raised using the halfway
position on the power window
switch.
• Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
If an object less than 0.16 in. (4
mm) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may
not detect the resistance and will
not stop and reverse direction.
417
Features of your vehicle
Power window lock button
• The driver can disable the power win-
dow switches on a passenger door by
depressing the power window lock
switch located on the driver’s door to
LOCK (pressed).
• When the power window lock switch
is ON, the driver’s master control
cannot operate the passenger door
power windows.
Manual windows (if equipped)
To raise or lower the window, turn the
window regulator handle clockwise or
counterclockwise.
OHD046010
WARNING
When opening or closing the win-
dows, make sure your passenger's
arms, hands and body are safely
out of the way.
B050A01E
WARNING
• Passengers can be injured if their
head, hands or other body parts
are trapped by a closing window.
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window.
• NEVER leave the ignition key in
the vehicle.
• NEVER leave any child unattend-
ed in the vehicle. Even very
young children may inadvertently
cause the vehicle to move, entan-
gle themselves in the windows,
or otherwise injure themselves or
others.
Features of your vehicle
184
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the
hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the
hood slightly, pull the secondary latch
(1) inside of the hood center and lift
the hood (2).
3.Pull the support rod from the engine
room.
4.Hold the hood open with the support
rod.
HOOD
OHD046011 OHD046012 OHD046013
WARNING - Hot parts
Grasp the support rod in the area
wrapped in rubber. The rubber will
help prevent you from being burned
by hot metal when the engine is
hot.
419
Features of your vehicle
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-
lowing:
• All filler caps in engine compartment
must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the hood until it is about 1 ft. (30
cm) above the closed position and let
it drop. Make sure that it locks into
place.
WARNING - Hood
• Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are removed
from the hood opening. Closing
the hood with an obstruction
present in the hood opening may
result in property damage or
severe personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
WARNING
Make sure the hood is properly
locked before driving.
WARNING
• Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility,
which might result in an accident.
• The support rod must be inserted
completely into the hole provided
in the hood whenever you inspect
the engine compartment. This will
prevent the hood from falling and
possibly injuring you.
• Do not move the vehicle with the
hood in the raised position, as
vision is obstructed and the hood
could fall or be damaged.
Features of your vehicle
204
Opening the fuel filer lid
The fuel-filler lid must be opened from
inside the vehicle by pulling up on the
fuel-filler lid opener located on the front
floor area on the left side of the car.
✽✽NOTICE
If the fuel-filler lid will not open because
ice has formed around it, tap lightly or
push on the lid to break the ice and
release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If
necessary, spray around the lid with an
approved de-icer fluid (do not use radi-
ator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to melt.
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the fuel
filler lid opener up.
3. Pull the fuel filler lid out to open.
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank
cap counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap is
securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it light-
ly and make sure that it is securely
closed.
FUEL FILLER LID
OHD046014 OUN026020
WARNING
To avoid injury from sharp edges, it
is recommended that protective
gloves be worn if there is a need to
open the fuel filler door manually.
421
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Refueling
• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and thus subject you to the risk
of fire and burns. Always remove
the fuel cap carefully and slowly.
If the cap is venting fuel or if you
hear a hissing sound, wait until
the condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Tighten the cap until it clicks, oth-
erwise the " " light will illumi-
nate.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
WARNING - Refueling dan-
gers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines care-
fully. Failure to follow these guide-
lines may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death by fire
or explosion.
• Before refueling note the location
of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-
Off, if available, at the gas station
facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or fab-
ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static elec-
tricity. Static electricity discharge
can ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must re-
enter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching a metal part
of the vehicle, away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle or other gaso-
line source.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container be sure to
place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling
has begun, contact with the vehi-
cle should be maintained until
the filling is complete.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
224
(Continued)
Use only approved portable plas-
tic fuel containers designed to
carry and store gasoline.
• Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cel-
lular phones can potentially
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
• When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling is
complete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are
securely closed, before starting
the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If a fire breaks out during refuel-
ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-
cle, and immediately contact the
manager of the gas station and
then contact the local fire depart-
ment or 911. Follow any safety
instructions they provide.
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel with unleaded
fuel only.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
Hyundai cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can result
in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control
system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.
• If the fuel filler lid will not open in
cold weather because the area
around it is frozen, push or lightly
tap the lid.
• After refueling, make sure the fuel
cap is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event of
an accident.
423
Features of your vehicle
If your vehicle is equipped with this fea-
ture, you can slide or tilt your sunroof
with the sunroof control buttons located
on the overhead console.
1. Slide button
2. Tilt button
3. Close button
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
✽✽NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, sunroof may
not work properly due to freezing con-
ditions.
✽✽NOTICE
After washing the car or after there is
rain, be sure to wipe off any water that
is on the sunroof before operating it.
✽✽NOTICE
The sunroof cannot slide when it is in
the tilt position nor can it be tilted while
in an open or slide position.
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
OHD046016 CAUTION
Do not continue to press the sun-
roof control button(s) after the sun-
roof is in the fully open, closed, or
tilt position(s). Damage to the motor
or system components could occur.
WARNING
Never adjust the sunshade while
driving. This could result in loss of
control and an accident that may
cause death, serious injury, or
property damage.
Features of your vehicle
244
Sliding the sunroof
To open the sunroof (autoslide feature),
press the slide button (1) on the over-
head console (for more than 0.5 sec-
onds).
The sunroof will slide all the way open. To
stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
press any sunroof control button.
To close the sunroof (autoslide feature),
press the close button (3) on the over-
head console (for more than 0.5 sec-
onds).
The sunroof will slide all the way close.To
stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
press any sunroof control button.
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is detect-
ed while the sunroof is closing automati-
cally, it will reverse direction, and then
stop.
Auto reverse function does not work if a
tiny obstacle is blocked between the slid-
ing glass and the sunroof sash. You
should always check that all passengers
and objects are away from the sunroof
before closing it.
Tilting the sunroof
To open the sunroof (autotilt feature),
press the tilt button (2) on the overhead
console (for more than 0.5 seconds).
The sunroof will tilt all the way open. To
stop the sunroof tilting at any point, press
any sunroof control button.
To close the sunroof, press the close but-
ton (3) on the overhead console and hold
it until the sunroof is closed.
OHD046018
WARNING
Be careful that someone’s head,
hands and body are not trapped by
a closing sunroof.
OHD046017 OUN026027
425
Features of your vehicle
Sunshade
The sunshade will be opened with the
glass panel automatically when the glass
panel is slid. You will have to close it
manually if you want it closed.
OUN026031
WARNING - Sunroof
• Do not extend face, neck, arms or
body outside through the sunroof
opening while driving.
• Make sure hand and face are
safely out of the way before clos-
ing a sunroof.
CAUTION
• Do not press any sunroof control
button longer than necessary.
Damage to the motor or system
components could occur.
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be dam-
aged.
• The sunroof is made to slide
together with sunshade. Do not
leave the sunshade closed while
the sunroof is open.
Features of your vehicle
264
In case of an emergency
If the sunroof does not open electrically:
1. Open the sunglass holder.
2. Remove the two (2) screws, and then
remove the overhead console.
3. Insert the emergency handle (provided
with the vehicle) and turn the handle
clockwise to open or counterclockwise
to close.
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-
nected or discharged, or you use the
emergency handle to operate the sun-
roof, you have to reset your sunroof sys-
tem as follows:
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON posi-
tion.
2. According to the position of the sun-
roof, do as follows.
1) in case that the sunroof has closed
completely or been tilted :
Press the tilt button until the sun-
roof has tilted upward completely.
2) in case that the sunroof has slide-
opened:
Press and hold the close button
(for more than 5 seconds) until the
sunroof has closed completely.
Press the tilt button until the sun-
roof has tilted upward completely.
3. Release the tilt button.
4. Press and hold the tilt button (for
more than 10 seconds) until the sun-
roof has returned to the original posi-
tion of tilt after it is raised a little high-
er than the maximum tilt position.
Then, release the button.
OHD046019
OUN026030
OHD046083
427
Features of your vehicle
5. Press and hold the tilt button (for
more than 5 seconds) until the sun-
roof is operated as follows;
TILT DOWN →SLIDE OPEN →
SLIDE CLOSE
Then, release the button.
When this is complete, the sunroof sys-
tem is reset.
Features of your vehicle
284
Electronic power steering
Power steering uses the motor to assist
you in steering the vehicle. If the engine
is off or if the power steering system
becomes inoperative, the vehicle may
still be steered, but it will require
increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is con-
trolled by power steering control unit
which sense the steering wheel torque,
steering wheel position and vehicle
speed to command the motor.
The steering wheel becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s speed
decreases for the better control of the
steering wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power steer-
ing checked by an authorized Hyundai
dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur dur-
ing normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not illumi-
nate.
• The steering wheel becomes heavier
after turning the ignition switch on.
This happens as the system performs
the EPS system diagnostics. When the
diagnostics is completed, the steering
wheel will return to its normal condi-
tion.
• Click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON or LOCK position.
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving
speed.
• The steering effort can suddenly
increase, if the operation of EPS sys-
tem is stopped to prevent serious acci-
dents when the malfunction of EPS
system is detected by self-diagnosis.
Tilt steering
Tilt steering allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before you drive. You can
also raise it to give your legs more room
when you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
while permitting you to see the instru-
ment panel warning lights and gauges.
STEERING WHEEL
429
Features of your vehicle
To change the steering wheel angle, pull
down the lock release lever (1), adjust
the steering wheel to the desired angle
(2) and height (3), then pull up the lock-
release lever to lock the steering wheel in
place. Be sure to adjust the steering
wheel to the desired position before driv-
ing.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn sym-
bol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle and height
of steering wheel while driving.
You may lose your steering con-
trol and cause severe personal
injury or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be
certain it is locked in position.
OHD046021
CAUTION
• To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on
your steering wheel (see illustra-
tion). The horn will operate only
when this area is pressed.
• Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist.
Do not press on the horn with a
sharp-pointed object.
OHD046022
Features of your vehicle
304
Inside rearview mirror
Day/night rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror to center on
the view through the rear window. Make
this adjustment before you start driving.
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and while the day/night lever is in
the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.
Remember that you lose some rearview
clarity in the night position.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automatical-
ly controls the glare from the headlights
of the car behind you in nighttime or low
light driving conditions. The sensor
mounted in the mirror senses the light
level around the vehicle, and through a
chemical reaction, automatically controls
the headlight glare from vehicles behind
you.
When the engine is running, the glare is
automatically controlled by the sensor
mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted into
reverse (R), the mirror will automatically
go to the brightest setting in order to
improve the drivers view behind the vehi-
cle.
MIRRORS
WARNING - Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision out the
rear window.
OHD046023
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the liq-
uid cleaner to enter the mirror hous-
ing.
431
Features of your vehicle
To operate the electric rearview mirror
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn
the automatic dimming function on.
The mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the ON/OFF button to turn the
automatic- dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
• The mirror defaults to the ON position
whenever the ignition switch is turned
on.
Electric chromic mirror with homelink
system (if equipped)
To operate the electric rearview mirror
Press the I button (1) to turn the auto-
matic- dimming function on. The mirror
indicator light will illuminate.
Press the O button (2) to turn the auto-
matic- dimming function off. The mirror
indicator light will turn off.
HomeLink® Wireless Control System
Your new mirror comes with an integrat-
ed HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
which allows you to program the mirror to
activate your garage door(s), estate gate,
home lighting, etc. The mirror actually
learns the codes from your various exist-
ing transmitters.
OHD046024 OHD046025N OHD046305N
Glare detection sensor
Indicator light
Homelink buttons
Features of your vehicle
324
Retain the original transmitter for future
programming procedures (i.e., new vehi-
cle purchase). It is also suggested that
upon the sale of the vehicle, the pro-
grammed HomeLink buttons be erased
for security purposes (follow step 1 in the
“Programming” portion of this text).
Programming
Your vehicle may require the ignition
switch to be turned to the ACC position
for programming and/or operation of
HomeLink. It is also recommended that a
new battery be replaced in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being pro-
grammed to HomeLink for quicker train-
ing and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency.
Follow these steps to train your
HomeLink mirror:
1. When programming the buttons for the
first time, press and hold
the left and
center buttons (
,
)
simultane-
ously until the indicator light begins to
flash after approximately 20 seconds.
(This procedure erases the factory-set
default codes. Do not perform this step
to program additional hand-held trans-
mitters.)
WARNING
• When programming the
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System, you may be operating a
garage door or gate operator.
Make sure that people and objects
are out of the way of the moving
door or gate to prevent potential
harm or damage.
• Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by federal safety
standards. (This includes any
garage door opener model manu-
factured before April 1, 1982.) A
garage door opener which cannot
detect an object, signaling the
door to stop and reverse, does
not meet current federal safety
standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features
increases risk of serious injury or
death. For more information, call
1-800-355-3515 or on the internet
at www.homelink.com.
OHD046306N
Flashing
433
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
For non rolling code garage door open-
ers, follow steps 2 - 3.
For rolling code garage door openers,
follow steps 2 - 6.
For Canadian Programming, please fol-
low the Canadian Programming section.
For help with determining whether your
garage is non-rolling code or rolling
code, please refer to the garage door
openers owner’s manual or contact
HomeLink customer service at 1-800-
355-3515.
2. Press and hold the button on the
HomeLink system you wish to train
and the button on the transmitter while
the transmitter is approximately 1 to 3
inches away from the mirror. Do not
release the buttons until step 3 has
been completed.
3. The HomeLink indicator light will flash,
first slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both but-
tons may be released. (The rapid flash-
ing light indicates successful program-
ming of the new frequency signal.)
✽✽NOTICE
Some gate operators and garage door
openers may require you to replace step
#3 with the “cycling” procedure noted in
the “Canadian Programming” section
of this document.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other
rolling code equipped devices) with the
rolling code feature, follow these instruc-
tions after completing the “Programming”
portion of this text. (A second person
may make the following training proce-
dures quicker & easier.)
4. Locate the “learn” or “smart” button on
the device’s motor head unit. Exact
location and color of the button may
vary by product brand. If there is diffi-
culty locating the “learn” or “smart” but-
ton, reference the device’s owner’s
manual or contact HomeLink at 1-800-
355-3515 or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
5. Press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button on the device’s motor
head unit. You have 30 seconds to
complete step number 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press
and release the programmed
HomeLink button up to three times.
The rolling code equipped device
should now recognize the HomeLink
signal and activate when the
HomeLink button is pressed. The
remaining two buttons may now be
programmed if this has not previously
been done. Refer to the
“Programming” portion of this text.
OHD046307N
Flashing
1-3inches
Transmitter
Features of your vehicle
344
Operating HomeLink
To operate, simply press the pro-
grammed HomeLink button. Activation
will now occur for the trained product
(garage door, security system, entry door
lock, estate gate, or home or office light-
ing). For convenience, the hand-held
transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time. The HomeLink
Wireless Controls System (once pro-
grammed) or the original hand-held
transmitter may be used to activate the
device (e.g. garage door, entry door lock,
etc.). In the event that there are still pro-
gramming difficulties, contact HomeLink
at 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
Erasing programmed HomeLink but-
tons
To erase the three programmed buttons
(individual buttons cannot be erased):
• Press and hold the left and center
buttons simultaneously, until the indi-
cator light begins to flash (approxi-
mately 20 seconds). Release both but-
tons. Do not hold for longer than 30
seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or learning)
mode and can be programmed at any
time.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink
button
To program a device to HomeLink using
a HomeLink button previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button. Do NOT release until step 4
has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
away from the HomeLink surface.
3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button (or press and “cycle” - as
described in “Canadian Programming”
above).
4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash,
first slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light begins to flash rapidly,
release both buttons.
The previous device has now been
erased and the new device can be acti-
vated by pushing the HomeLink button
that has just been programmed.This pro-
cedure will not affect any other pro-
grammed HomeLink buttons.
OHD046306N
Flashing
435
Features of your vehicle
Gate operator programming & canadi-
an programming
During programming, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop trans-
mitting. Continue to press and hold the
HomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4
in the “Programming” portion of this text)
while you press and re-press (“cycle”)
your handheld transmitter every two sec-
onds until the frequency signal has been
learned. The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly after several sec-
onds upon successful training.
Accessories
If you would like additional information on
the HomeLink Wireless Control System,
HomeLink compatible products, or to
purchase other accessories such as the
HomeLink® Lighting Package, please
contact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or
on the internet at www.homelink.com.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both left-
hand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch. The mir-
ror heads can be folded back to prevent
damage during an automatic car wash or
when passing in a narrow street.
CAUTION
If programming a garage door
opener or gate, it is advised to
unplug the device during the
“cycling” process to prevent possi-
ble motor burn-up.
WARNING
The HomeLink transmitter has
been tested and complies with FCC
and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
IC: 4112104541A Gentex
MODEL/FCC ID: NZLSTDHL3
Features of your vehicle
364
Remote control
Manual type
The outside rearview mirrors are
equipped with a remote control for your
convenience. It is operated by the control
lever in the bottom front corner of the
window.
Before driving away, always check that
your mirrors are positioned so you can
see behind you, both to the left and right
sides, as well as directly behind your
vehicle. When using the mirror, always
exercise caution when attempting to
judge the distance of vehicles behind or
along side of you.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use
an approved spray de-icer (not radi-
ator antifreeze) to release the
frozen mechanism or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle
is moving. This could result in loss
of control, and an accident which
could cause death, serious injury
or property damage.
B510A01E
WARNING - Rearview mir-
rors
• The right outside rearview mirror
is convex. Objects seen in the
mirror are closer than they
appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror
or direct observation to deter-
mine the actual distance of fol-
lowing vehicles when changing
lanes.
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface
of the glass. If ice should restrict
movement of the mirror, do not
force the mirror for adjustment. To
remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a
sponge or soft cloth with very warm
water.
437
Features of your vehicle
Electric type (if equipped)
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors. To
adjust the position of either mirror, move
the lever (1) to R or L to select the right
side mirror or the left side mirror, then
press a corresponding point ( ) on the
mirror adjustment control to position the
selected mirror up, down, left or right.
After adjustment, put the lever into neu-
tral position to prevent the inadvertent
adjustment.
Folding the outside rearview mirror
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the
housing of mirror and then fold it toward
the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate while the switch is
depressed. Do not depress the
switch longer than necessary, the
motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the out-
side rearview mirror by hand.
Doing so may damage the parts.
B510E01EOHD046025
Features of your vehicle
384
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. Engine temperature gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. Shift position indicator
(Automatic transaxle only)
7. Odometer/Trip computer
8. Fuel gauge
OHD047027N
439
Features of your vehicle
Instrument panel illumination
When the vehicle’s parking lights or head-
lights are on, rotate the illumination con-
trol knob to adjust the instrument panel
illumination intensity.
The instrument cluster illumination inten-
sity can be adjusted by rotating the con-
trol knob with the headlight switch in any
position when the ignition switch is in ON
position.
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the forward
speed of the vehicle.
The speedometer is calibrated in miles
per hour and/or kilometers per hour.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the approxi-
mate number of engine revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
When the door is open, and if the engine
is not started in 1 minute, the tachometer
pointer may move slightly in ACC or ON
position with the engine OFF. This move-
ment is normal and will not affect the
accuracy of the tachometer once the
engine is running.
OHD046045L OHD046028N OHD046029
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
Features of your vehicle
404
Engine temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in the Index.
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
The fuel tank capacity is given in sec-
tion 9.
The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which will illumi-
nate when the fuel tank is nearly empty.
OHD046031
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
“H” position, it indicates overheat-
ing that may damage the engine.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The engine
coolant is under pressure and
could erupt and cause severe
burns. Wait until the engine is cool
before adding coolant to the reser-
voir.
OHD046032
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addition-
al fuel as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when the
gauge indicator comes close to the
E level.
441
Features of your vehicle
Odometer/Tripmeter (if equipped)
You can choose the odometer, tripmeter
A or tripmeter B by pressing the TRIP
button for less than 1 second.
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful to
determine when periodic maintenance
should be performed.
✽✽NOTICE
It is forbidden that alteration of the
odometer of any vehicle with the intent
to change the mileage registered on the
odometer. The alteration may void your
warranty coverage.
Tripmeter
TRIP A: Tripmeter A
TRIP B: Tripmeter B
The tripmeter indicates the distance of
individual trips selected by the driver.
Tripmeter A or B can be reset to 0 by
pressing the TRIP button for 1 second or
more, and then releasing.
OHD046036NOHD046035 OHD046033N
Features of your vehicle
424
Trip computer (if equipped)
The trip computer is a microcomputer-
controlled driver information system that
displays information related to driving,
including distance to empty, tripmeter,
average fuel consumption and average
speed on the display when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
Mode selection
Push the TRIP button for less than 1 sec-
ond to select distance to empty, tripme-
ter, average fuel consumption and aver-
age speed functions.
Distance to empty
This mode indicates the estimated dis-
tance to empty based on the current fuel
in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel
delivered to the engine. When the
remaining distance is below 30 miles (50
km), a “----” symbol will be displayed.
The meter’s working range is from 30 to
999 miles (50 to 999 km).
OHD046035
Average fuel consumption
Average speed
Tripmeter
Distance to empty
OHD046041N
443
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupt-
ed, the “Distance to empty” function
may not operate correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons
(6 liters) of fuel are added to the vehi-
cle.
• The fuel consumption and distance to
empty values may vary significantly
based on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty value is an esti-
mate of the available driving distance.
This value may differ from the actual
driving distance available.
Average fuel consumption
This mode calculates the average fuel
consumption from the total fuel used and
the distance since the last average con-
sumption reset. The total fuel used is cal-
culated from the fuel consumption input.
For an accurate calculation, drive more
than 0.03 miles (50 m).
The meter's working range is from 0.1 to
199.9 miles per gallon (0.1 to 199.9 l/100
km).
Press the TRIP button for more than 1
second to reset the average fuel con-
sumption to zero (---).
Average speed
This mode indicates the average speed
from the starting of the engine to the igni-
tion key "OFF".
Average speed is reset to zero if the bat-
tery is disconnected.
To reset the average speed to zero (---),
press the TRIP button for more than 1
second.
The meter’s working range is from 0 to
999 MPH.
OHD046039N OHD046040N
Average speed
Odometer
Features of your vehicle
444
Tripmeter
This mode indicates the total distance
travelled since the last tripmeter reset.
Total distance is also reset to zero if the
battery is disconnected.
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second when the tripmeter is being dis-
played clears the tripmeter to zero.
The meter's working range is from 0 to
999.9 miles.
Warnings and indicators
All warning lights are checked by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). Any light that does not illuminate
should be checked by an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
are still on, this indicates a situation that
needs attention. When releasing the
parking brake, the brake system warning
light should go off. The fuel warning light
will stay on if the fuel level is low.
Air bag warning light
This warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
This light also comes on when the SRS
is not working properly. If the AIR BAG
warning light does not come on, or con-
tinuously remains on after operating for
about 6 seconds when you turned the
ignition switch to the ON position or start-
ed the engine, or if it comes on while
driving, have the SRS inspected by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light
(if equipped)
This light illuminates if the ignition switch
is turned to ON and goes off in approxi-
mately 3 seconds if the system is operat-
ing normally.
If the ABS warning light remains on,
comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, this indicates
that there may be a problem with the
ABS.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized Hyundai dealer as soon
as possible. The normal braking system
will still be operational, but without the
assistance of the anti-lock brake system.
OHD046043N
Tripmeter
Odometer
AIR
BAG
445
Features of your vehicle
Electronic brake force distri-
bution (EBD) system warning
light
If two warning lights illumi-
nate at the same time while
driving, your vehicle has a
problem with ABS and EBD
system.
In this case, your ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.
Seat belt warning
Seat belt warning light
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition key is turned ON, the
seat belt warning light blinks for approxi-
mately 6 seconds. And if the vehicle
speed exceeds 10km/h with the seat belt
unfastened, the seat belt warning light
blinks with the pattern of 6 seconds on
and 24 seconds off for 11 times.The seat
belt warning light will stop if the seat belt
is fastened or the vehicle speed is
reduced to below 5km/h.
Seat belt warning chime
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition key is turned ON, the
seat belt warning chime sounds for
approximately 6 seconds. And if the vehi-
cle speed exceeds 10 km/h with the seat
belt unfastened, the seat belt warning
chime sounds with the pattern of 6 sec-
onds on and 24 seconds off for 11 times.
The seat belt warning chime will stop if
the seat belt is fastened or the vehicle
speed is reduced to below 5 km/h.
Turn signal indicator lights
The blinking green arrows on the instru-
ment panel show the direction indicated
by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on
but does not blink, blinks more rapidly
than normal, or does not illuminate at all,
a malfunction in the turn signal system is
indicated. Your dealer should be consult-
ed for repairs.
High beam indicator
This indicator illuminates when the head-
lights are on and in the high beam posi-
tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
WARNING
If the both ABS and Brake warning
lights are on and stay on, your vehi-
cle’s brake system will not work
normally. So you may experience
an unexpected and dangerous situ-
ation during sudden braking. In this
case, avoid high speed driving and
abrupt braking. Have your vehicle
checked by an authorized Hyundai
dealer as soon as possible.
Features of your vehicle
464
Engine oil pressure warn-
ing
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates while driv-
ing:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, call an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
Parking brake & brake
fluid warning
Parking brake warning
This light is illuminated when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the START or ON position. The warning
light should go off when the parking
brake is released.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required. Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly.
Have it towed to any authorized
Hyundai dealer for a brake system
inspection and necessary repairs.
CAUTION
If the engine is not stopped imme-
diately after the engine oil pressure
warning light is illuminated, severe
damage could result.
CAUTION
If the oil pressure warning light
stays on while the engine is run-
ning, serious engine damage may
result. The oil pressure warning
light comes on whenever there is
insufficient oil pressure. In normal
operation, it should come on when
the ignition switch is turned on,
then go out when the engine is
started. If the oil pressure warning
light stays on while the engine is
running, there is a serious malfunc-
tion.
If this happens, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so, turn off
the engine and check the oil level. If
the oil level is low, fill the engine oil
to the proper level and start the
engine again. If the light stays on
with the engine running, turn the
engine off immediately. In any
instance where the oil light stays on
when the engine is running, the
engine should be checked by an
authorized Hyundai dealer before
the car is driven again.
447
Features of your vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diago-
nal braking systems. This means you still
have braking on two wheels even if one
of the dual systems should fail. With only
one of the dual systems working, more
than normal pedal travel and greater
pedal pressure are required to stop the
car. Also, the car will not stop in as short
a distance with only a portion of the
brake system working. If the brakes fail
while you are driving, shift to a lower gear
for additional engine braking and stop the
car as soon as it is safe to do so.
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
Front fog light indicator
(if equipped)
This light comes on when the front fog
lights are ON.
Shift pattern indicators
(if equipped)
The individual indicators illu-
minate to show the automat-
ic transaxle shift lever selec-
tion.
Charging system warning
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the genera-
tor drive belt for looseness or break-
age.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-
lem exists somewhere in the electrical
charging system. Have an authorized
Hyundai dealer correct the problem as
soon as possible.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light on is dangerous. If the brake
warning light remains on, have the
brakes checked and repaired imme-
diately by an authorized Hyundai
dealer.
Features of your vehicle
484
Trunk lid open warning
light
This warning light illuminates when the
trunk lid is not closed securely with the
ignition in any position.
Door ajar warning light
This warning light illuminates when a
door is not closed securely with the igni-
tion in any position.
Low fuel level
warning
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. When it comes on, you
should add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the fuel level warning light on
or with the fuel level below “E” can cause
the engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter.
Malfunction indicator lamp
(MIL) (check engine light)
This indicator light is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this light illuminates while driving, it indi-
cates that a potential problem has been
detected somewhere in the emission
control system.
This light will also illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion, and will go out in a few seconds
after the engine is started. If it illuminates
while driving, or does not illuminate when
the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-
tion, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized Hyundai dealer and have the
system checked.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable, but have the system checked by
an authorized Hyundai dealer promptly.
Low washer fluid level
warning indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light indicates the washer
fluid reservoir is near empty. Refill the
washer fluid as soon as possible.
CAUTION
• Prolonged driving with the
Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light
( ) illuminated may cause
damage to the emission control
systems which could effect dri-
vability and/or fuel economy.
•
If the
Emission
Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light ( )
illuminates, potential catalytic
converter damage is possible
which could result in loss of
engine power. Have the Engine
Control System inspected as soon
as possible by an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
449
Features of your vehicle
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) indicator
(if equipped)
The ESC indicator will illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned ON, but
should go off after approximately 3 sec-
onds. When the ESC is on, it monitors
the driving conditions and under normal
driving conditions, the ESC light will
remain off. When a slippery or low trac-
tion condition is encountered, the ESC
will operate, and the ESC indicator will
blink to indicate the ESC is operating.
ESC OFF indicator
(if equipped)
The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned ON,
but should go off after approximately 3
seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,
press the ESC OFF button. The ESC
OFF indicator will illuminate indicating
the ESC is deactivated. If this indicator
stays on in the ESC ON mode, the ESC
may have a malfunction. Take your car to
an authorized Hyundai dealer and have
the system checked.
Cruise indicator
(if equipped)
CRUISE indicator
The indicator light illuminates when the
cruise control system is enabled.
The cruise indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster is illuminated when the
cruise control ON/OFF button on the
steering wheel is pulled.
The indicator light turns off when the
cruise control ON/OFF button is pushed
again. For more Information about the
use of cruise control, refer to section 5,
“Cruise control system”.
Cruise SET indicator
The indicator light illuminates when the
cruise function switch (COAST/SET or
RES/ACCEL) is ON.
The cruise SET indicator light in the
instrument cluster is illuminated when
the cruise control switch (COAST/SET or
RES/ACCEL) is pushed. The cruise SET
indicator light does not illuminate when
the cruise control switch (CANCEL) is
pushed or the system is disengaged.
Key reminder warning chime
(if equipped)
If the driver’s door is opened while the
ignition key is left in the ignition switch
(ACC or LOCK position), the key
reminder warning chime will sound. This
is to prevent you from locking your keys
in the vehicle. The chime sounds until the
key is removed from the ignition switch or
the driver’s door is closed.
Electronic power steering
(EPS) system warning light
This indicator light comes on after the
ignition key is turned to the ON position
and then it will go out with the engine
started.
This light also comes on if the EPS has a
malfunction. If it comes on while driving,
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
ESC
CRUISE
ESC
OFF
SET
EPS
Features of your vehicle
504
Low tire pressure
telltale (if equipped)
The low tire pressure telltale
comes on for 3 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position.
If the warning light does not come on, or
continuously remains on after coming on
for about 3 seconds when you turned the
ignition switch to the ON position, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System is not
working properly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
This warning light will also illuminate if
one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible. If
the warning light illuminates while driv-
ing, reduce vehicle speed immediately
and stop the vehicle. Avoid hard braking
and overcorrecting at the steering wheel.
Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s tire information
placard.
TPMS (Tire pressure mon-
itoring system)
malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
TPMS malfunction indicator comes on for
3 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position. If the warning
light does not come on, or continuously
remains on after coming on for about 3
seconds when you turned the ignition
switch to the ON position, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is not work-
ing porperly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
The warning light also comes on and
stays on when there is a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If this happens, the system may not mon-
itor the tire pressure. Have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS
WARNING - Low tire pres-
sure
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and can
contribute to loss of vehicle control
and increased braking distances.
Continued driving on low pressure
tires will cause the tires to overheat
and fail. WARNING - Safe stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you feel any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator, apply the brakes
gradually and with light force,
and slowly move to a safe posi-
tion off the road.
451
Features of your vehicle
The hazard warning flasher should be
used whenever you find it necessary to
stop the car in a hazardous location.
When you must make such an emer-
gency stop, always pull off the road as far
as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on
by pushing in the hazard switch. This
causes all turn signal lights to blink. The
hazard warning lights will operate even
though the key is not in the ignition.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch a second time.
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to pre-
vent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the small light when the driver
removes the ignition key and opens the
driver- side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights will
be turned off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed, per-
form the following :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the fol-
lowing positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
OHD046108LOHD046044L
LIGHTING
Features of your vehicle
524
Parking light position ( )
When the light switch is in the parking
light position (1st position), the tail, posi-
tion, license and instrument panel lights
are ON.
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the headlight
position (2nd position) the head, tail,
position, license and instrument panel
lights are ON.
✽✽NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
High - beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it back
for low beams.
The high-beam indicator will light when
the headlight high beams are switched
on.
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on for a
prolonged time while the engine is not
running.
OUN026222 OUN026225OUN026221
453
Features of your vehicle
Flashing headlights
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low-beam) position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
Turn signals and lane change sig-
nals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down
(A). Green arrow indicators on the instru-
ment panel indicate which turn signal is
operating. They will self-cancel after a
turn is completed. If the indicator contin-
ues to flash after a turn, manually return
the lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position
(B). The lever will return to the OFF posi-
tion when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
✽✽NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick
or slow, bulb may be burned out or have
a poor electrical connection in the cir-
cuit.
OUN026226OUN026224
Features of your vehicle
544
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility and avoid accidents when visibil-
ity is poor due to fog, rain or snow etc.
The fog lights will turn on when fog light
switch (1) is turned to ON after the head-
lights are turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch
to OFF.
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the ignition
switch is turned ON.
: For a single wiping cycle, push the
lever upward and release it with
the lever in the OFF position. The
wipers will operate continuously if
the lever is pushed upward and
held.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in a light rain or mist. To
vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob(1). (S : slow
operation, F: fast operation)
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
✽✽NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
OHD046046OUN026219
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor or
unnecessary battery and generator
drain could occur.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
455
Features of your vehicle
Windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever gently
toward you to spray washer fluid on the
windshield and to run the wipers 1-3
cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is
dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will con-
tinue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not
sufficient, you will need to add appropri-
ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid
to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the
passenger side.
OHD046048
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windshield with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
contact with the windshield and
obscure your vision.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
Features of your vehicle
564
✽✽NOTICE
Do not use the interior lights for extend-
ed periods when engine is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
Map lamp
Push in the map lamp lens to turn the
light on or off. This light produces a spot
beam for convenient use as a map lamp
at night or as a personal lamp for the
driver and the passenger.
Dome lamp
DOOR
In the DOOR position, the light comes on
when any door is opened regardless of
the ignition switch position. The light
goes out gradually after 30 seconds if the
door is closed. However if the ignition
switch is ON or all doors are locked, the
light will turn off even within 30 seconds.
INTERIOR LIGHT
OHD046049 OHD046050
457
Features of your vehicle
ON
In the ON position, the light stays on at all
times.
OFF
In the OFF position, the light stays off at
all times even though a door is open.
Trunk room lamp
The trunk room lamp comes on when the
trunk is opened.
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when the
glove box is opened.
The parking lights or headlights must be
ON for the glove box lamp to function.
OHD046051OHD046104
CAUTION
Do not leave the switch in this posi-
tion for an extended period of time
when the vehicle is not running.
Features of your vehicle
584
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will
automatically turn on the mirror light.
OHD046052
459
Features of your vehicle
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
interior and exterior of the rear window,
while engine is running.
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
located in the center facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of snow on
the rear window, brush it off before oper-
ating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 20 minutes or when the
ignition switch is turned off. To turn off the
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button again.
Outside mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the out-
side mirror defroster, it will be operating
at the same time when you operate the
rear window defroster.
DEFROSTER
OHD046053
OHD046054N
Type A
Type B
CAUTION
• To prevent damage to the con-
ductors bonded to the inside sur-
face of the rear window, never use
sharp instruments or window
cleaners containing abrasives to
clean the window.
• If you want to defrost and defog
on the front windshield, refer to
“Windshield Defrosting and
Defogging” in this section.
Features of your vehicle
604
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OHD046056N
1. Temperature control knob
2. Fan speed control knob
3. Mode selection knob
4. Air conditioning button (if equipped)
5. Air intake control button
6. Rear window defroster button
461
Features of your vehicle
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system (if equipped)
on.
OHD046058L
Features of your vehicle
624
Mode selection
The mode selection knob controls the
direction of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dash-
board outlets, or windshield. Five sym-
bols are used to represent Face, Bi-
Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost
air position.
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the
inside of the vehicle faster. The "OFF"
mode is used to turn the blower fan off.
MAX A/C-Level (B, D)
Air is discharged through the face level
vents.
If the "MAX A/C" mode is selected, the
A/C will turn on automatically and
"Recirculation" mode will be activated.
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, C, E)
Air flow is discharged towards the face
and floor.
OFF
The fan is turned off.
Floor-Level (C, E, A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side win-
dow defroster.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, E, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
OHD046057N
463
Features of your vehicle
Instrument panel vents
If air flow control is not satisfactory, check
the instrument panel vents. The outlet
port can be opened or closed separately
using the horizontal thumbwheel. To
close the vent, rotate it left to the maxi-
mum position. To open the vent, rotate it
right to the desired position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows you
to control the temperature of the air flow-
ing from the ventilation system. To
change the air temperature in the pas-
senger compartment, turn the knob to
the right position for warm and hot air or
left position for cooler air.
Air intake control
This is used to select outside (fresh) air
position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
OHD046061OHD046060 OHD046062N
Features of your vehicle
644
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button is illuminated when
the recirculated air position
is selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
passenger compartment
will be drawn through the
heating system and heated
or cooled according to the
function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button is not illuminated
when the outside (fresh) air
position is selected.
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and
is heated or cooled accord-
ing to the function selected.
✽✽NOTICE
It should be noted that prolonged oper-
ation of the heating in recirculated air
position will cause fogging of the wind-
shield and side windows and the air
within the passenger compartment will
become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected, will result in excessive-
ly dry air in the passenger compart-
ment.
WARNING
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to
increase inside vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure
visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air
conditioning or heating system
on. It may cause serious harm or
death due to a drop in the oxygen
level and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle
control. Set the air intake control
to the outside (fresh) air position
as much as possible while driv-
ing.
465
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows you to
control the fan speed of the air flowing
from the ventilation system. To change
the fan speed, turn the knob to the right
for higher speed or left for lower speed.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-
tioning system on (indicator light will illu-
minate). Push the button again to turn the
air conditioning system off.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
to the or position.
OHD046063N OHD046064
Features of your vehicle
664
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the car through the ventilation
system, temporarily set the air intake
control to the recirculated air position.
Be sure to return the control to the
fresh air position when the irritation
has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windshield. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air condi-
tioning system, and adjust temperature
control to desired temperature.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
All Hyundai Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with environmentally friendly
R-134a refrigerant which is not damag-
ing to the ozone layer.
1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-
tioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-
perature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired, set
the temperature control to the extreme
left position, set the mode control to
the MAX A/C position, then set the fan
speed control to the highest speed.
✽✽NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be run
with the windows closed.
467
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of win-
dows on rainy or humid days, decrease
the humidity inside the vehicle by oper-
ating the air conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system opera-
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month if only for a few minutes to
ensure maximum system perform-
ance.
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, you may notice clear water drip-
ping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehi-
cle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position does
provide maximum cooling, however,
continual operation in this mode may
cause the air inside the vehicle to
become stale.
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehi-
cle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windshield even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized Hyundai deal-
er.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
CAUTION
• Replace the filter every 10,000
miles (15,000 km) or once a year.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough
roads, more frequent climate con-
trol air filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate is sudden-
ly decreased, the system should
be checked at an authorized deal-
er.
Features of your vehicle
684
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and compres-
sor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-
ence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
When the performance of the air condi-
tioning system is reduced it is important
that the correct type and amount of oil
and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, dam-
age to the compressor and abnormal
system operation may occur.
CAUTION
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
Hyundai dealer. Improper service
may cause serious injury to the per-
son performing the service.
469
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Front windshield defrost button
2. Rear window defrost button
3. Air conditioning button
4. Air intake control button
5. Temperature control button
6. Fan speed control button
7. AUTO (automatic control) button
8. OFF button
9. Mode selection button
10. A/C display
OHD047066
Features of your vehicle
704
Automatic heating and air condi-
tioning
The automatic climate control system is
controlled by simply setting the desired
temperature.
The Full Automatic Temperature Control
(FATC) system automatically controls the
heating and cooling system as follows;
1. Push the AUTO button. It is indicated
by AUTO on the display. The modes,
fan speeds, air intake and air-condi-
tioning will be controlled automatically
by temperature setting.
2. Push the TEMP button to set the
desired temperature.
If the temperature is set to the lowest
setting LO, the air conditioning system
will operate continuously.
3. To turn the automatic operation off,
press any button except temperature
control button. If you press the mode
selection button, air-conditioning but-
ton, defrost button, air intake control
button or fan speed button, the select-
ed function will be controlled manually
while other functions operate automat-
ically.
Regardless of the temperature setting,
when using automatic operation, the air
conditioning system can automatically
turn on to decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle, even if the temperature is set
to warm.
OUN026312
CAUTION
Never place anything over the sen-
sor located on the instrument panel
to ensure better control of the heat-
ing and cooling system.
OHD046067
471
Features of your vehicle
Manual heating and air condition-
ing
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually as well by pushing
buttons other than the AUTO button. In
this case, the system works sequentially
according to the order of buttons select-
ed.
When pressing any button except AUTO
button while automatic operation, the
functions of the buttons not selected will
be controlled automatically.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system (if equipped)
on.
Press the AUTO button in order to con-
vert to full automatic control of the sys-
tem.
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted as
follows:
Refer to the illustration in the “Manual cli-
mate control system”.
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, C, E)
Air flow is discharged towards the face
and floor.
OHD047068
Features of your vehicle
724
Floor-Level (C, E, A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side win-
dow defroster.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, E, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters. Defrost-level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
If air flow control is not satisfactory, check
the instrument panel vents. The outlet
port can be opened or closed separately
using the horizontal thumbwheel. To
close the vent, rotate it left to the maxi-
mum position. To open the vent, rotate it
right to the desired position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
OHD046069 OHD046060
473
Features of your vehicle
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the maxi-
mum HI by pushing the up button. Each
push of the button will cause the tempera-
ture to increase by 1°F/0.5°C.
The temperature will decrease to the mini-
mum LO by pushing the down button.
Each push of the button will cause the
temperature to decrease by 1°F/0.5°C.
When set to the lowest temperature set-
ting, the air conditioning will operate con-
tinuously.
Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, the temperature mode dis-
play will reset to Fahrenheit.
This is normal condition. You can switch
the temperature mode between
Fahrenheit to Centigrade as follows;
While depressing the AUTO button,
depress the OFF button for 3 seconds or
more. The display will change from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade, or from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit.
Air intake control
This is used to select outside (fresh) air
position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
OHD046070 OHD047071
Features of your vehicle
744
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the but-
ton is illuminated when the
recirculated air position is
selected.
With the recirculated air posi-
tion selected, air from pas-
senger compartment will be
drawn through the heating
system and heated or cooled
according to the function
selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the but-
ton is not illumimated when
the outside (fresh) air posi-
tion is selected.
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and
is heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
✽✽NOTICE
It should be noted that prolonged oper-
ation of the heating in recirculated air
position will cause fogging of the wind-
shield and side windows and the air
within the passenger compartment will
become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected, will result in excessive-
ly dry air in the passenger compart-
ment.
WARNING
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to
increase inside vehicle which may
fog the glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air
conditioning or heating system on.
It may cause serious harm or death
due to a drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control system
operation in the reciruclated air
position can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle
control. Set the air intake control to
the outside (fresh) air position as
much as possible while driving.
475
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by pressing the fan speed control
button.
The higher the fan speed is, the more air
is delivered.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
Air conditioning
Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-
tioning system on (indicator light will illu-
minate).
Push the button again to turn the air con-
ditioning system off.
Outside tempmeter
The current outer temperature is dis-
played in 1°C where the temperature
range is between -40°F ~ 140°F (-40°C ~
60°C).
OHD047073 OHD047074 OHD047075
Features of your vehicle
764
OFF mode
Push the OFF button to turn off the air cli-
mate control system. However you can
still operate the mode and air intake but-
tons as long as the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
OHD046076
477
Features of your vehicle
• For maximum defrosting, set the temper-
ature control to the extreme right/hot posi-
tion and the fan speed control to the
highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while
defrosting or defogging, set the mode to
the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice from
the windshield, rear window, outside rear
view mirrors, and all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood and
air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater
and defroster efficiency and to reduce the
probability of fogging up inside of the
windshield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select any fan speed except 0 posi-
tion.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the or position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-
tioning will be selected automatically.
If the air-conditioning and outside (fresh)
air position are not selected automatical-
ly, press the corresponding button manu-
ally.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-
tioning will be selected automatically.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
OHD046077N OHD046078N
CAUTION - Windshield
heating
Do not use the or position
during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The dif-
ference between the temperature of
the outside air and that of the wind-
shield could cause the outer sur-
face of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this
case, set the mode selection knob
or button to the position and
fan speed control knob or button to
the lower speed.
Features of your vehicle
784
Automatic climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired fan speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4. The air-conditioning will be turned on
according to the detected ambient
temperature, outside (fresh) air posi-
tion and higher fan speed will be
selected automatically.
If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh) air
position and higher fan speed are not
selected automatically, adjust the corre-
sponding button or knob manually.
If the position is selected, lower fan
speed is controlled to higher fan speed.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set fan speed to the highest (extreme
right) position.
2. Set temperature to the extreme hot
(HI) position.
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4. The air-conditioning will be turned on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh) air
position will be selected automatically.
If the position is selected, lower fan
speed is controlled to higher fan speed.
Defogging logic
To reduce the probability of fogging up
the inside of the windshield, the air intake
or air conditioning are controlled auto-
matically according to certain conditions
such as or position. To cancel or
return the defogging logic, do the follow-
ings.
OHD046079 OHD046080
479
Features of your vehicle
Manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
2. Turn the mode selection knob to the
defrost position ( ).
3. Push the air intake control button
( ) at least 5 times within 3 sec-
onds.
The indicator light in the air intake control
button will blink 3 times with 0.5 second
of interval. It indicates that the defogging
logic is canceled or returned to the pro-
grammed status.
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, it is reset to the defog logic
status.
Automatic climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
2. Select the defrost position pressing
defrost button ( ).
3. While holding the air conditioning but-
ton (A/C) pressed, press the air intake
control button ( ) at least 5 times
within 3 seconds.
The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5
second of interval. It indicates that the
defogging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it is reset to the defog logic
status.
OHD046105N OHD046106
Features of your vehicle
804
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or passengers.
Center console storage
(if equipped)
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or front passenger.
To open the center console storage pull
up the lever.
Glove box
To open the glove box, pull the handle
and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other flamma-
ble/explosive materials in the vehi-
cle. These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to place
so many items in the storage
compartment that the storage
compartment cover can not close
securely.
OHD046081 OHD046082
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
481
Features of your vehicle
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press the
cover and the holder will slowly open.
Place your sunglasses in the compart-
ment door with the lenses facing out.
Push to close.
Multi box (if equipped)
To open the cover, push the button. It can
be used for storing small items.
OHD046083
CAUTION
Make sure the sunglass holder is
closed while driving.
WARNING
• Do not keep objects except sun-
glass inside the sunglass holder.
Such objects can be thrown from
the holder in the event of a sud-
den stop or an accident, possibly
injuring the passengers in the
vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass holder
while the vehicle is moving. The
rear view mirror of the vehicle
can be blocked by an open sun-
glass holder.
OHD046084
Features of your vehicle
824
Cigarette lighter
For the cigarette lighter to work, the igni-
tion switch, must be in the ACC position
or the ON position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the
way into its socket. When the element
has heated, the lighter will pop out to the
"ready" position.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed
in. This can damage the heating element
and create a fire hazard.
If it is necessary to replace the cigarette
lighter, use only a genuine Hyundai
replacement or its approved equivalent.
Ashtray
The front ashtray may be opened by
pulling the ashtray lid. To clean the ash-
tray, the plastic receptacle should be
removed by lifting the plastic ash recep-
tacle upward and pulling it out.
INTERIOR FEATURES
OHD046085
CAUTION
• Do not hold the lighter in after it is
already heated because it will
overheat.
• Only a genuine Hyundai lighter
should be used in the cigarette
lighter socket. The use of plug-in
accessories (shavers, hand-held
vacuums, and coffee pots, for
example) may damage the socket
or cause electrical failure.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
OHD046086
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays
as waste receptacles.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches
in an ashtray with other com-
bustible materials may cause a
fire.
483
Features of your vehicle
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull
it downward, unsnap it from the bracket
(1) and swing it to the side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (3).
Adjust the sunvisor extension panel for-
ward or backward (4) (if equipped).
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you could be burned.
Such a burn to the driver could
cause a loss of control of the
vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden stop
or collision, do not place uncov-
ered or unsecured bottles, glass-
es, cans, etc., in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion.
OHD046087
Front
OHD046088
Rear (if equipped) OHD046089L
Features of your vehicle
844
Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to provide
power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle
electrical systems. The devices should
draw less than 10 amps with the engine
running.
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp (if equipped)
Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvisor to
its original position after use. If the
vanity mirror is not closed securely,
the lamp will stay on and could
result in battery discharge and pos-
sible sunvisor damage.
OHD046090
CAUTION
• Use power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the
accessory plug after use. Using
the accessory plug for prolonged
periods of time with the engine
off could cause the battery to dis-
charge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in elec-
tric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio static and
malfunctions in other electronic
systems or devices used in your
vehicle.
485
Features of your vehicle
Digital clock
Whenever the battery terminals, related
fuses are disconnected, you must reset
the time.
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, the clock buttons operate as
follows:
• HOUR:
Pressing the “H” button (2) with your
finger, a pencil or similar object will
advance the time displayed by one
hour.
• MINUTE:
Pressing the “M” button (3) with your
finger, a pencil or similar object will
advance the time displayed by one
minute.
• RESET:
To clear away minutes, press the “R”
button (1) with your finger, a pencil or
similar object. Then the clock will be
set precisely on the hour.
For example, if the “R” button is
pressed while the time is between 9:01
and 9:29, the display will be reset to
9:00.
9:01 ~ 9:29 display changed to 9:00
9:30 ~ 9:59 display changed to 10:00
Clothes hanger
To use the hanger, pull down the upper
portion of hanger.
OHD046091N
WARNING
Do not adjust the clock while driv-
ing. You may lose your steering
control and cause severe personal
injury or accidents.
OUN026348
CAUTION
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
Features of your vehicle
864
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the cargo
area, you can use the four holders locat-
ed in the cargo area to attach the lug-
gage net.
Contact your authorized Hyundai dealer
to obtain a luggage net.
OHD046107
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods or
the vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky
objects in the luggage compart-
ment.
WARNING
Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over-
stretch. The luggage net ALWAYS
keep your face and body out of its
recoil path. DO NOT use when the
strap has visible signs of wear or
damage.
487
Features of your vehicle
Antenna
Fixed Rod Antenna (if equipped)
Your car uses a fixed rod antenna to
receive both AM and FM broadcast sig-
nals. This antenna is a removable type.
To remove the antenna, turn it counter-
clockwise. To install the antenna, turn it
clockwise.
Glass antenna (if equipped)
When the radio power switch is turned on
while the ignition key is in either the ON
or ACC position, your car will receive
both AM and FM broadcast signals
through the antenna in the rear window
glass.
Satellite Antenna (if equipped)
The satellite antenna is installed on the
roof of your car to listen to a satellite
radio broadcast. This antenna is fixed by
nut and it can not be removed.
✽✽NOTICE
In the place like a tunnel where the
satellite broadcast signal can not be
reached, the ability of broadcast signal
reception can be affected and downed.
AUDIO SYSTEM
OHD046093 OHD037900N
CAUTION
• Do not clean the inside of the rear
window glass or quarter glass
with a cleaner or use a scraper to
remove any foreign deposits as
this may cause damage to the
antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coating
such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These
can interfere with AM/FM recep-
tion.
B870A01A
CAUTION
• Be sure to remove the antenna
before washing the car in an auto-
matic car wash or it may be dam-
aged.
• When reinstalling your antenna, it
is important that it is fully tight-
ened to ensure proper reception.
Features of your vehicle
884
Audio remote control
(if equipped)
The steering wheel audio remote control
button is installed to promote safe driv-
ing.
✽✽NOTICE
Do not operate audio remote control
buttons simultaneously.
MODE (1)
Press the button to select Radio, Tape (if
equipped) or CD (compact disc).
VOL (
▲
/
▼
) (3)
• Press the up button (▲) to increase
volume.
• Press the down button (▼) to decease
volume.
SEEK (
▲
/
▼
) (2)
If the SEEK button is pressed for 0.8 sec-
ond or more, it will work as follows in
each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select
button.
TAPE mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
CDP mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
CDC mode
It will function as the DISC UP/DOWN
button.
If the SEEK button is pressed for less
than 0.8 second, it will work as follows in
each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION
select buttons.
TAPE mode
It will function as the AUTO MUSIC
Search(AMS) button.
CDP mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
CDC mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is described in the following
pages in this section.
OHD046094
489
Features of your vehicle
How car audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast
from transmitter towers located around your
city.They are intercepted by the radio anten-
na on your car. This signal is then received
by the radio and sent to your car speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best pos-
sible quality reproduction. However, in
some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear. This
can be due to factors such as the dis-
tance from the radio station, closeness of
other strong radio stations or the pres-
ence of buildings, bridges or other large
obstructions in the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts.
This is because AM radio waves are
transmitted at low frequencies. These
long, low frequency radio waves can fol-
low the curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight out into the atmos-
phere. In addition, they curve around
obstructions so that they can provide bet-
ter signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station. Also,
FM signals are easily affected by build-
ings, mountains, or other obstructions.
These can result in certain listening con-
ditions which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The fol-
lowing conditions are normal and do not
indicate radio trouble:
¢¢¢
JBM001
¢¢¢
¢¢¢
JBM002 JBM003
FM reception AM reception FM radio station
Features of your vehicle
904
• Fading - As your car moves away from
the radio station, the signal will weaken
and sound will begin to fade. When this
occurs, we suggest that you select
another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the trans-
mitter and your radio can disturb the
signal causing static or fluttering nois-
es to occur. Reducing the treble level
may lessen this effect until the distur-
bance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful sig-
nal near the same frequency may
begin to play. This is because your
radio is designed to lock onto the clear-
est signal. If this occurs, select anoth-
er station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflect-
ed signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has
passed.
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio equipment. This does not mean
that something is wrong with the audio
equipment. In such a case, use the cellu-
lar phone at a place as far as possible
from the audio equipment.
¢¢¢
JBM004 JBM005
CAUTION
When using a communication sys-
tem such a cellular phone or a radio
set inside the vehicle, a separate
external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and adverse-
ly affect safe operation of the vehi-
cle.
WARNING
We recommend that you never use
a cell phone while driving. This
could result in loss of control, and
an accident that may cause death,
serious injury, or property damage.
You must stop at a safe place to use
a cellular phone.
491
Features of your vehicle
Care of cassette tapes
(if equipped)
• Because the thickness of a cassette
tape with the total playback time of
over 60 minutes (C-60) are too thin, we
suggest that you do not use any of
them to avoid having tapes being tan-
gled.
• To achieve better sound quality, period-
ically clean the tape head using a cot-
ton stick with colorless alcohol (once
per month).
• If a tape is too loose, fasten it to reel by
winding with objects like a pencil.
• Because dust or foreign objects on a
cassette tape may damage the play-
back head, always store tapes in their
cases when not in use.
• Make sure cassette tapes are kept
away from magnetic devices (TV,
stereo system, etc) in order to achieve
better sound quality.
•
Be certain that no objects or substances
other than cassette tapes are inserted
into the cassette tape player.
• Because tape media can be distorted
when exposed to direct sunlight, Do
not leave cassette tapes on the seats,
dashboard or near the back wind-
shield.
Care of disc (if equipped)
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows for ventilation
before using your car audio.
• It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE files without
permission(If equipped with M465, use
only MP3/WMA, If equipped with M445,
use only CD-DA). Use CDs that are cre-
ated only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners
and magnetic sprays made for ana-
logue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from get-
ting damaged. Hold and carry CDs by
the edges or the edges of the center
hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of
soft cloth before playback (wipe it from
the center to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper
onto it.
• Make sure on undesirable matter other
than CDs are inserted into the CD
player (Do not insert more than one
CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-
RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate
normally according to manufacturing
companies or making and recording
methods. In such circumstances, if you
still continue to use those CDs, they
may cause the malfunction of your car
audio system.
✽✽NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy-Protected
Audio CD
Some copy-protected CDs, which do not
comply with the international audio CD
standards(Red Book), may not play on
your car audio. Please note that if you
try to play copy protected CDs and the
CD player of your car audio is not per-
forming to your expectation, this may be
caused by those CDs and not a defect in
the device itself. Please replace those
CDs.
Features of your vehicle
924
1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
2. BAND Select Button
3. TUNE/MODE Select Knob
4. AUTO SEEK Select Button
5. SCAN Button
6. PRESET Station Select Buttons
HD_420 AM
STEREO RADIO PLAYER OPERATION (M420) (IF EQUIPPED)
493
Features of your vehicle
1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob
The radio unit may be operated when the
ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-
tion. Press the knob to switch the power
on. The LCD shows the radio frequency
in the radio mode or the tape direction
indicator in the tape mode. To switch the
power off, press the knob again.
VOLUME Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the volume and turn the knob counter-
clockwise to reduce the volume.
AVC(Auto Volume Control) Feature
As the Vehicle runs faster, Vehicle run-
ning noise also becomes louder.
To offset this noise, the unit has *AVC
feature that increases its volume level
automatically when vehicle's speed gets
faster.
2. BAND Select Button
Pressing the button changes
the AM, FM1 and FM2 bands.
3. TUNE/MODE Select Knob
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the frequency and turn the knob counter-
clockwise to reduce the frequency.
Mode Select Knob
Pressing the MODE knob changes the
BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and
BALANCE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the dis-
play.
After selecting the each mode, rotate the
mode select knob clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MID,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TRE-
BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
FADER Control
Rotate the control knob clockwise to
emphasize rear speaker sound (front
speaker sound will be attenuated). When
the control knob is turned counterclock-
wise, front speaker sound will be empha-
sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-
ated).
BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control
knob is turned counterclockwise, left
speaker sound will be emphasized (right
speaker sound will be attenuated).
FM/AM
Features of your vehicle
944
4. AUTO SEEK Select Button
(Automatic Channel Selection)
Press the AUTO SEEK select button.
When the side is pressed, the unit
will automatically tune to the next higher
frequency and when the side is
pressed, it will automatically tune to the
next lower frequency.
5. SCAN Button
When you press the button, frequency is
changed and the next channel is
received automatically. To stay on a sta-
tion, press the SCAN button again.
6. PRESET STATION Select
Buttons
Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
respectively can be preset in the elec-
tronic memory circuit.
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be
programmed into the memory of the
radio. Then, by simply pressing the AM /
FM select button and/or one of the six
station select buttons, you may recall any
of these stations instantly. To program the
stations, follow these steps:
• Press AM/FM selector to set the band
for AM, FM1 and FM2.
• Select the desired station to be stored
by seek or manual tuning.
• Determine the preset station select
button you wish to use to access that
station.
• Press the station select button for more
than two seconds. A select button indi-
cator will show in the display indicating
which select button you have
depressed. The frequency display will
flash after it has been stored into the
memory. You should then release the
button, and proceed to program the
next desired station. A total of 24 sta-
tions can be programmed by selecting
one AM and two FM station per button.
• When completed, any preset station
may be recalled by selecting AM, FM1
or FM2 band and the appropriate sta-
tion button.
CAUTION
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. The audio sys-
tem mechanism may be damaged
if you spill them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage
to the system mechanisms could
occur.
495
Features of your vehicle
1. Tape Program/AUX Button
2. Tape Eject Button
3. DOLBY Button
4. REPEAT (RPT) Button
5. AUTO MUSIC Search (AMS) Button
6. FF/REW Button
HD_420
CASSETTE TAPE PLYER OPERATION (M420) (IF EQUIPPED)
Features of your vehicle
964
1. TAPE PROGRAM/AUX Button
This allows you to play the reverse side
of the tape by merely pressing the pro-
gram button. The PLAY and an arrow will
appear in the display to show tape direc-
tion.
• If you press this button more than 0.8
seconds. you can change to AUX
mode.
• AUX mode is available only when AUX
jack is plugged in and change back to
last mode if you pull it out.
2. TAPE EJECT Button
• When the button is pressed with a
cassette loaded, the cassette will eject.
• When the button is pressed during
FF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.
3. DOLBY Button
If you get background noise during tape
PLAY, you can reduce this considerably
by merely pressing the DOLBY button. If
you want to cancel the DOLBY feature,
press the button again.
4. REPEAT (RPT) Button
• To repeat the track you are currently
listening to, press the RPT button. To
cancel , press again.
• If you do not release RPT operation
when the track ends, it will automati-
cally be replayed.
This process will be continued until you
push the button again.
5. AUTO MUSIC Search (AMS)
Button
Press the button to find the starting point
of each song in a prerecorded music
tape. The quiet space between songs
(must have at least a 4 sec. gap) can be
identified by the AUTO MUSIC Search
button.
• Pressing the will play the begin-
ning of the next music segment.
• Pressing the will start replay at the
beginning of the music just listened to.
• To stop FF or REW action, press the
button again.
6. FF/REW Button
• Fast forward tape winding starts when
the FF button is pressed during PLAY
or REW mode.
• PLAY starts when the FF button is
pressed again during FF mode.
• Tape rewinding starts when the
REW button is pressed during PLAY or
FF mode.
• PLAY starts when the REW button
pressed again during REW mode.
CAUTION
o Do not insert anything like coins
into the player slot as damage to
the unit may occur.
o Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. The playback
mechanism may be damaged if
you spill them.
o Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage
to the system mechanisms could
occur.
o When no device is connected to
the AUX cable, please pull out the
cable from the JACK on the car.
(AUX MODE is operational and
noise may heard in the AUX
MODE.)
497
Features of your vehicle
1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
2. Band Select Buttons
3. TUNE/MODE Select Knob
4. AUTO SEEK Select Button
5. SCAN Button
6. EQ Button
7. PRESET STATION Select Buttons
HD_445 AM
STEREO RADIO PLAYER OPERATION (M445) (IF EQUIPPED)
Features of your vehicle
984
1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob
The radio unit may be operated when the
ignition key is in the “ACC”or “ON” posi-
tion. Press the knob to switch the power
on. The LCD shows the radio frequency
in radio mode or displays the CD track in
CD mode. To switch the power off, press
the knob again.
VOLUME Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the volume and turn the knob counter-
clockwise to reduce the volume.
AVC(Auto Volume Control) Feature
As the Vehicle runs faster, Vehicle run-
ning noise also becomes louder.
To offset this noise, the unit has *AVC
feature that increases its volume level
automatically when vehicle's speed gets
faster.
2. BAND Select Buttons
FM Selection Button
Pressing the button changes the
FM1 and FM2 bands.
AM Selection Button
Pressing the button selects the
AM band. AM mode is displayed on LCD.
3. TUNE/MODE Select Knob
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the frequency and turn the knob counter-
clockwise to reduce the frequency.
Mode Select Knob
Pressing the MODE knob changes the
BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and
BALANCE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the dis-
play.
After selecting the each mode, rotate the
mode select knob clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MID-
DLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TRE-
BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
FADER Control
Rotate the control knob clockwise to
emphasize rear speaker sound (front
speaker sound will be attenuated). When
the control knob is turned counterclock-
wise, front speaker sound will be empha-
sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-
ated).
BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control
knob is turned counterclockwise, left
speaker sound will be emphasized (right
speaker sound will be attenuated).
AM
FM
499
Features of your vehicle
4. AUTO SEEK Select Button
(Automatic Channel Selection)
Press the AUTO SEEK select button.
When the side is pressed, the unit
will automatically tune to the next higher
frequency and when the side is
pressed, it will automatically tune to the
next lower frequency.
5. SCAN Button
When you press the button, frequency is
changed and the next channel is
received automatically. To stay on a sta-
tion, press the SCAN button again.
6. EQ Button
Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-
SIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF
MODE for the desired tone quality. Each
press of the button changes the display
as follows;
7. PRESET STATION Select
Buttons
Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
respectively can be preset in the elec-
tronic memory circuit.
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be
programmed into the memory of the
radio. Then, by simply pressing the AM /
FM select buttons and/or one of the six
station select buttons, you may recall any
of these stations instantly. To program the
stations, follow these steps:
• Press AM/FM selector to set the band
for AM, FM1 and FM2.
• Select the desired station to be stored
by seek or manual tuning.
• Determine the preset station select
button you wish to use to access that
station.
• Press the station select button for more
than two seconds. A select button indi-
cator will show in the display indicating
which select button you have
depressed. The frequency display will
flash after it has been stored into the
memory. You should then release the
button, and proceed to program the
next desired station. A total of 24 sta-
tions can be programmed by selecting
one AM and two FM station per button.
• When completed, any preset station
may be recalled by selecting AM, FM1
or FM2 band and the appropriate sta-
tion button.
✽✽NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
CLASSIC➟POPS➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟DEFEAT
CAUTION
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. The audio sys-
tem mechanism may be damaged
if you spill them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage
to the system mechanisms could
occur.
Features of your vehicle
1004
1. CD/AUX Select Button
2. Track Up/Down Button
3. FF/REW Button
4. REPEAT (RPT) Button
5. CD SCAN Button
6. CD Eject Button
7. RANDOM (RDM) Button
HD_445 AM
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M445) (IF EQUIPPED)
4101
Features of your vehicle
1. CD/AUX Select Button
• Insert the CD with the label facing
upward.
• Insert the CD to start CD playback,
during radio operation.
• When a disc is in the CD deck, if you
press the CD button the CD player will
begin playing even if the radio player is
being used.
• The CD player can be used when the
ignition switch is in either the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
• Push the CD button to start CD play-
back without pushing Power ON-OFF
control knob. (Only when a CD is in the
deck.
• If you press this button you can change
to AUX mode.
• AUX mode is available only when AUX
jack is plugged in and change back to
last mode if you pull it out.
✽✽NOTICE
• Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the
label side or the recording side of any
discs, as it may cause a malfunction.
• The unit cannot play a CD-
R(Recordable CD) and CD-
RW(Rewritable CD) that is not final-
ized. Please refer to the manual of CD-
R/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-RW
software for more information on
finalization process.
• Depending on the recording status,
some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not be
played on this unit.
2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button
• The desired track on the disc currently
being played can be selected using the
track number.
• Press button once to skip forward to
the beginning of the next track.
Press within a second after play-
back begins to quickly move backward
through a CD.
If you press after more than a sec-
ond, it will take you to the beginning of
the track you are now listening to.
3. FF/REW Button
If you want to fast forward or reverse
through the compact disc track, push and
hold the FF or REW button.
When you release the button, the com-
pact disc player will resume playing.
4. REPEAT (RPT) Button
• To repeat the track you are currently
listening to, press the RPT button. To
cancel, press it again.
• If you do not release RPT operation
when the track ends, it will automati-
cally be replayed.
This process will be continued until you
push the button again or turn the radio
OFF then ON.
5. CD SCAN Button
• To playback the first 10 seconds of
each track, press the CD SCAN button.
• Press the CD SCAN button again with-
in 10 sec. when you have reached the
desired track.
Features of your vehicle
1024
6. CD EJECT Button
When the button is pressed with a CD
loaded, the CD will eject.
Forcing to eject : To force to eject a CD,
press this button for more than 3 sec-
onds.
(Do this only when a CD is jammed and
you can not eject it in the normal way -
e.g.) in case that you have inserted 2
CDs by mistake)
7. RANDOM (RDM) Button
Press the RDM button to listen the tracks
in random, rather than sequential, order.
Press it again to cancel random play.
✽✽NOTICE
• To assure proper operation of the unit,
keep the vehicle interior temperature
within a normal range by using the
vehicle's air conditioning or heating
system.
• When replacing the fuse, replace it
with a fuse having the correct capaci-
ty.
• All stored bookmarks are all erased
when the car battery is disconnected
or power to the vehicle is lost. If this
occurs, the bookmarks will have to be
reset.
• This equipment is designed to be used
only in a 12 volt DC battery system
with negative ground.
• This unit is made of precision parts.
Do not attempt to disassemble or
adjust any parts.
• When driving your vehicle, be sure to
keep the volume of the unit set low
enough to allow you to hear sounds
coming from the outside.
• Do not expose this equipment (includ-
ing the speakers and CD) to water or
excessive moisture.
CAUTION
• Do not insert warped or poor
quality discs into the CD player
as damage to the unit may occur.
• Do not insert anything like coins
into the player slot as damage to
the unit may occur.
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. The playback
mechanism may be damaged if
you spill them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage
to the system mechanisms could
occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Off-road or rough surface driving
may cause the compact disc to
skip. Do not use the compact
disc when driving in such condi-
tions as damage to the compact
disc face could occur.
• Do not attempt to grab or pull the
compact disc out while the disc is
being pulled into the audio unit
by the self-loading mechanism.
Damage to the audio unit and
compact disc could occur.
• Avoid using recorded compact
discs in your audio unit. Original
compact discs are recommended.
• When using the EQ funtion, turn
off the EQ funtion of the device
on the AUX input.
• When no device is connected to
the AUX cable, please pull out the
cable from the JACK on the car.
(AUX MODE is operational and
noise may heard in the AUX
MODE.)
4103
Features of your vehicle
1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
2. BAND Select Button
3. TUNE/AUDIO Control Knob
4. AUTO SEEK Select Button
5. SCAN Button
6. EQ Button
7. PRESET Station Select Buttons
8. AUDIO Mode Select
HD_465 AM
STEREO RADIO PLAYER OPERATION (M465) (IF EQUIPPED)
Features of your vehicle
1044
1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob
The radio unit may be operated when the
ignition key is in the "ACC" or “ON” posi-
tion. Press the knob to switch the power
on. The LCD shows the radio frequency
in the radio mode, the tape direction indi-
cator in the tape mode or CD track in
either the CD mode or CD AUTO
CHANGER mode. To switch the power
off, press the knob again.
VOLUME Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the volume and turn the knob counter-
clockwise to reduce the volume.
AVC(Auto Volume Control) Feature
As the Vehicle runs faster, Vehicle run-
ning noise also becomes louder.
To offset this noise, the unit has *AVC
feature that increases its volume level
automatically when vehicle's speed gets
faster.
2. BAND Select Button
Pressing the FM/AM button changes the
AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode
selected is shown on the display.
3. TUNE/AUDIO Control Knob
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the frequency and turn the knob counter-
clockwise to reduce the frequency.
AUDIO Contrl Knob
Pressing the AUDIO Mode select button
changes the BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE,
FADER and BALANCE mode. The mode
selected is shown on the display.
BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MID,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TRE-
BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
FADER Control
Rotate the control knob clockwise to
emphasize rear speaker sound (front
speaker sound will be attenuated). When
the control knob is turned counterclock-
wise, front speaker sound will be empha-
sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-
ated).
BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control
knob is turned counterclockwise, left
speaker sound will be emphasized (right
speaker sound will be attenuated).
4. AUTO SEEK Select Button
(Automatic Channel Selection)
Press the AUTO SEEK select button.
When the side is pressed, the unit will
automatically tune to the next higher fre-
quency and when the side is pressed,
it will automatically tune to the next lower
frequency.
4105
Features of your vehicle
5. CD SCAN Button
• To playback the first 10 seconds of
each track, press the CD SCAN button.
• Press the CD SCAN button again with-
in 10 sec. when you have reached the
desired track.
6. EQ Button
Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-
SIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF
MODE for the desired tone quality. Each
press of the button changes the display
as follows;
7. PRESET STATION Select
Buttons
Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
respectively can be preset in the elec-
tronic memory circuit.
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be
programmed into the memory of the
radio. Then, by simply pressing the AM /
FM select button and/or one of the six
station select buttons, you may recall any
of these stations instantly. To program the
stations, follow these steps:
• Press AM/FM selector to set the band
for AM, FM1 and FM2.
• Select the desired station to be stored
by seek or manual tuning.
• Determine the preset station select
button you wish to use to access that
station.
• Press the station select button for more
than two seconds. A select button indi-
cator will show in the display indicating
which select button you have
depressed. The frequency display will
flash after it has been stored into the
memory. You should then release the
button, and proceed to program the
next desired station. A total of 24 sta-
tions can be programmed by selecting
one AM and two FM station per button.
• When completed, any preset station
may be recalled by selecting AM, FM1
or FM2 band and the appropriate sta-
tion button.
8. AUDIO Mode select Button
Pressing the AUDIO Mode select button
changes the BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE,
FADER and BALANCE mode. The mode
selected is shown on the display.
After selecting the each mode, rotate the
TUNE knob clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
✽✽NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
CLASSIC➟POPS➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟DEFEAT CAUTION
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. The audio sys-
tem mechanism may be damaged
if you spill them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage
to the system mechanisms could
occur.
Features of your vehicle
1064
1. TAPE PROGRAM Button
2. TAPE EJECT Button
3. Auto Music Search (AMS) Button
4. DOLBY Button
5. FF/REW Button
6. REPEAT (RPT) Button
7. EQ Button
HD_465 AM
CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (M465) (IF EQUIPPED)
4107
Features of your vehicle
1. TAPE PROGRAM Button
This allows you to play the reverse side
of the tape by merely pressing the pro-
gram button. The PLAY and an arrow will
appear in the display to show tape direc-
tion.
2. TAPE EJECT Button
• When the EJECT button is pressed
with a cassette loaded, the cassette
will eject.
• When the EJECT button is pressed
during FF/REW mode, the cassette will
eject.
3. AUTO MUSIC Search (AMS)
Button
Press the button to find the starting point
of each song in a prerecorded music
tape. The quiet space between songs
(must have at least a 4 sec. gap) can be
identified by the AUTO MUSIC SEARCH
button.
• Pressing the will play the begin-
ning of the next music segment.
• Pressing the will start replay at the
beginning of the music just listened to.
• To stop FF or REW action, press the
button again.
4. DOLBY Button
If you get background noise during tape
PLAY, you can reduce this considerably
by merely pressing the DOLBY button. If
you want to cancel the DOLBY feature,
press the button again.
5. FF/REW Button
• Fast forward tape winding starts when
the FF button is pressed during PLAY
or REW mode.
• PLAY starts when the FF button is
pressed again during FF mode.
• Tape rewinding starts when the
REW button is pressed during PLAY or
FF mode.
• PLAY starts when the REW button
pressed again during REW mode.
6. REPEAT (RPT) Button
• To repeat the track you are currently
listening to, press the RPT button. To
cancel, press again.
• If you do not release RPT operation
when the track ends, it will automati-
cally be replayed.
This process will be continued until you
push the button again or turn the power
OFF then ON.
7. EQ Button
Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-
SIC, POPS, JAZZ, ROCK and OFF
MODE for the desired tone quality. Each
press of the button changes the display
as follows;
CLASSIC➟POPS➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟DEFEAT
CAUTION
• Do not insert anything like coins
into the player slot as damage to
the unit may occur.
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. The playback
mechanism may be damaged if
you spill them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage
to the system mechanisms could
occur.
Features of your vehicle
1084
1. LOAD Button
2. CD(AUDIO/MP3)/AUX Select Button
3. CD EJECT Button
4. TRACK UP/DOWN Button
5. SCROLL Button
6. FF/REW Button
7. EQ (Equalizer) Button
8. CD SCAN Button
9. MARK (Bookmark) Button
10. RPT (Repeat) Button
11. RDM (Random) Button
12. DISC UP/DOWN Button
13. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNE Select Knob)
14. DIR (Directory Search) Button
HD_465 AM
COMPACT DISC PLAYER/CD AUTO CHANGER OPERATION (M465) (IF EQUIPPED)
4109
Features of your vehicle
1. LOAD Button
This compact disc player will accommo-
date up to six compact discs.
To insert one disc into the player, do the
following:
1.Press and release the LOAD Button.
2.Blue light on the slot will be illuminated
and the lowest number of empty slot
will blink on the display. After "WAIT" is
displayed on the LCD, the slot will open
with "INSERT" displayed on the LCD.
3.Insert a disc partway into the slot, label
side up. The player will pull the disc in.
When the disc is inserted, the disc will
begin to play automatically.
✽✽NOTICE
• Playback of MP3, AAC, and WMA
file formats are supported. Load to
play time for these formats may be
longer due to the compressed nature
of these discs.
• The disc can be only inserted while the
green light is blinking on the slot.
• This CD player is suitable only for 12
cm discs, do not use irregular shaped
CDs.
To insert multiple discs into the player, do
the followings:
1.Press and hold the LOAD button for
one second or more.You will then hear
a beep sound and the green light on
the slot will be illuminated, and the
numbers of empty disc will blink on the
display.
2.After "WAIT" is displayed on the LCD
with the lowest number of empty slot
blinking, the slot will open with
"INSERT" displayed on the LCD.
3.Insert a disc partway into the slot, label
side up. The player will pull the disc in.
Once the disc is loaded, the numbers
of the empty disc will blink on the dis-
play continuously. If the next "DISC
NO." is displayed when the slot is illu-
minated, you can then load another
disc.
4.Load the remaining disc by following
the same procedures 1 and 2. When
you finished loading 6 discs, the CD
player will begin to play the last CD
loaded.
5.To load more than one disc but less
than six, complete Steps 1 and 2.
When you have finished loading discs,
press LOAD button to cancel the load-
ing function or wait for 10 seconds.
The CD player will begin to play the
last CD loaded. As each CD starts to
play, the DISC number will appear on
the display.
✽✽NOTICE
The disc player takes up to six discs.
Do not try to load more than six.
2. CD(AUDIO/MP3)/AUX Select
Button
• Press the CD Button to start CD play-
back, during radio operation or cas-
sette tape playing.
• When discs are in the CD deck, if you
press the CD button, the CD player will
begin playing even if the radio or cas-
sette player is being used.
• The CD player can be used when the
ignition switch is in either the "ON" or
"ACC" position.
• Push the CD button to start CD play-
back without pushing Power ON-OFF
control knob. (Only when a CD is in the
deck.
Features of your vehicle
1104
• If you press this button. you can
change to AUX mode.
• AUX mode is available only when AUX
jack is plugged in and change back to
last mode if you pull it out.
3. CD EJECT Button
• When the EJECT button is pressed
with a CD loaded, the CD will eject.
• To eject all of the discs, press this but-
ton for one second or more.
4. TRACK UP/DOWN Button
• The desired track on the disc currently
being played can be selected using the
track number.
• Press ( ) once to skip forward to
the beginning of the next track.
• Press ( ) once to skip back to the
beginning of the track.
5. SCROLL Button
When the CD is playing, you can scroll
through long file names by pressing the
DOLBY button for approximately one
second. The file name will appear on the
LCD for about three seconds.
6. FF/REW Button
While the disc is playing, if you hold down
the FF button continuously, the selected
track is advanced. Holding down the
REW button continuously moves the
selected track back.
7. EQ (Equalizer) Button
Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-
SIC, POPS, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT
MODE for the desired tone quality. Each
press of the button changes the display
as follows;
8. CD SCAN Button
• Press the CD SCAN button to playback
the first 10 seconds of each track.
• Press the CD SCAN button again with-
in 10 sec. when you have reached the
desired track.
• To playback the first 10 seconds of
each track in the selected folder, Press
the CD SCAN button within a second.
(MP3 CD only)
• To playback the first 10 seconds of
each file in the selected DISC (MP3
CD only), when press SCAN button for
one second or more.
9. MARK (Bookmark) Button
When the CD player unit is operating, the
desired track on the disc can be book-
marked by using the MARK button.
• Press the MARK button for more than
one second to bookmark the desired
track. "M" will be displayed on the LCD
and "MEMORY NO." will display for
approximately five seconds with beep
sound. To play the bookmarked tracks,
press the MARK button within one sec-
ond and select the book-marked track
to play.
• To erase a bookmarked track, press
the MARK button for more than one
second. This will erase the bookmark
with beep sound.
If you want to delete all tracks stored on
Mark Memory, press FILE SEARCH
knob in the Mark Play mode for more
than one second. You will hear a beep
sound and all tracks will be deleted from
Mark Memory with "MARK DELETE
ALL" displayed on the LCD.
CLASSIC➟POPS➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟DEFEAT
4111
Features of your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
Tracks stored on Mark Memory will be
automatically erased after you eject CDs
that contain those tracks.
10. RPT (Repeat) Button
• To repeat the track you are currently
listening to, press the RPT button. To
cancel, press it again. If it pressed for
more than one second, it will be
repeated all tracks within currently
played CD.
• To repeat the music within currently
played folder, press the RPT button for
more than one second. Then it will be
repeated in sequential order within the
currently played folder. To cancel,
press it again. (MP3 CD only)
• If you do not release RPT operation
when the track ends, it will automati-
cally be replayed. This process will be
continued until you push the button
again.
11. RDM (Random) Button
• For listen to the music in random order,
press the RDM Button with beep
sound for more than one second. To
cancel, press it again.
• For listen to the music within the cur-
rently played folder in random order,
press the RDM Button within one sec-
ond. To cancel, press it again within
one second. If it pressed for more than
one second, it will be played all in ran-
dom order within currently played CD
(MP3 CD only).
12. DISC UP/DOWN Button
• By pressing "DISC "/"DISC "
while CD changer is playing, you can
move to the previews/next disc and
playback automatically begins.
• If any of the slots does not contain a
CD, your car audio will skip empty slot
and plays only slot that contains a CD.
When switching CD’s, the LCD dis-
plays the selected CD’s number.
13. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNE
Select Knob)
• You can move through the track by
turning the FILE SEARCH knob clock-
wise or counterclockwise.
• After moving the desired file, press the
FILE SEARCH knob to playback in the
selected file.
• If you do not press the FILE SEARCH
knob within five seconds, the file
searching function will be released.
14. DIR (Directory Search) Button
• You can move through the folder by
pushing the DIR button to up ( ) and
down ( ).
• After moving the desired folder, press
the FILE SEARCH knob to play back in
the the selected folder. If you do not
press the FILE SEARCH knob within 5
seconds, the folder searching function
will be released. It is not operated in a
single folder.
Features of your vehicle
1124
✽✽NOTICE
• To assure proper operation of the unit,
keep the vehicle interior temperature
within a normal range by using the
vehicle’s air conditioning or heating
system.
• When replacing the fuse, replace it
with a fuse having the correct capaci-
ty.
• All stored bookmarks are all erased
when the car battery is disconnected
or power to the vehicle is lost. If this
occurs, the bookmarks will have to be
reset.
• Do not add any oil to the rotating
parts. Keep magnets, screwdrivers
and other metallic objects away from
the tape mechanism and head.
✽✽NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
CAUTION
• Do not insert warped or poor
quality discs into the CD player
as damage to the unit may occur.
• Do not insert anything like coins
into the player slot as damage to
the unit may occur.
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. The playback
mechanism may be damaged if
you spill them.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage
to the system mechanisms could
occur.
• Off-road or rough surface driving
may cause the com- pact disc to
skip. Do not use the compact disc
when driving in such conditions
as damage to the compact disc
face could occur.
• Do not attempt to grab or pull the
compact disc out while the disc is
being pulled into the audio unit
by the self-loading mechanism.
Damage to the audio unit and
compact disc could occur.
• This equipment is designed to be
used only in a 12 volt DC battery
system with negative ground.
• This unit is made of precision
parts. Do not attempt to disas-
semble or adjust any parts.
• When driving your vehicle, be
sure to keep the volume of the
unit set low enough to allow you
to hear sounds coming from the
outside.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not expose this equipment
(including the speakers and tape)
to water or excessive moisture.
• Avoid using recorded compact
discs in your audio unit. Original
compact discs are recommended.
• The unit is not sure of playing CD-
RW (Rewritable).
• When using the EQ funtion, turn
off the EQ funtion of the device
on the AUX input.
• When no device is connected to
the AUX cable, please pull out the
cable from the JACK on the car.
(AUX MODE is operational and
noise may heard in the AUX
MODE.)
4113
Features of your vehicle
HD445XM
1. Power Button and Volume Control
2. Automatic Channel Seek Button (SEEK)
3. Preset Memory Button
4. Manual Channel Select & Sound Quality
Control
5. SCAN Button
6. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
7. Radio Band (FM/AM) Selection Button
RADIO PART
Features of your vehicle
1144
1. Power Button and Volume
Control
• Used for turning on/off the audio sys-
tem.
• Press this button when using the audio
system to turn off the power.
• Turn the volume control clockwise to
increase volume and counterclock-
wise, to decrease. (The volume level is
displayed when adjusting the volume.)
2. Automatic Channel Seek
Button (SEEK)
Press this button to automatically find
and tune to next available channel.
(Press [ ] to automatically seek next
available channel in higher frequencies
and [ ] in lower frequencies.)
✽✽NOTICE
If the channel is not received well, use
the manual control (4).
3. Preset Memory Button
Press this button and hold for less than
0.8 seconds to easily listen to the channel
memorized to the button. Also, when you
are listening to the channel other than the
channel memorized to the button using
TUNE or SEEK, press the button you
wish to memorize current channel to and
hold for more than 0.8 seconds until it
beeps to memorize the channel.
4. Manual Channel Select &
Sound Quality Control
• When listening to a radio channel,
rotate this control to manually adjust
the frequency. Turn this control to the
right to increase the frequency and left,
to decrease.
• This selects all functions related with
audio quality.
• When listening to the audio system,
press this button to select following
sound qualities in respective order.
- BASS MIDDLE TREBLE
FADER BALANCE
EQUALIZER Current State
• Rotate the control to adjust the sound
mode when adjusting sound quality.
5. SCAN Button
Press this button to tune to all available
channels for 5 seconds each. (LCD will
display "SCAN") Press the button once
again to cancel scanning.
6. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
It displays the state of the system when
listening to the radio such as AM, FM1,
FM2, Stereo(ST), preset number, fre-
quency received, EQ mode (CLASSIC,
POP, ROCK, JAZZ) and SCAN status.
7. Radio Band (FM/AM) Selection
Button
• This selects FM/AM and the radio
band will change in the following order
every time you press the button.
- FM1 FM2 AM
• Press this button when CD or XM is on
to automatically change to radio mode.
• If the ignition switch of the automobile
is set to ACC (1st notch) or ON (2nd
notch), the system will be turned on
and automatically play the radio when
you press this button even if the power
of the audio system is off.
4115
Features of your vehicle
1. CD/AUX Selector
2. Disc Deck
3. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
4. Disc Eject Button
5. CD Indicator
6. SCAN Button
7. Search / Selection Button
8. RDM(Random) Button
9. RPT(Repeat) Button
10. Fast Forward/Rewind Button
11. Track Move (Track Up/Down) Button
12. Information Button
13. FLDER Name Search Button
14. Mark / Memory Button
HD445XM
CD PLAYER PART
Features of your vehicle
1164
1. CD/AUX Selector
• The system will start playing the CD
when you press this button while radio
or XM is on. (If no CD is found, the LCD
will display "NO DISC" for 3 seconds.)
• If the ignition switch of the automobile
is set to ACC (1st notch) or ON (2nd
notch), the system will be turned on
and automatically play the CD from the
last played part when you press this
button even if the power of the audio
system is off. (However, only when the
disc is placed inside the system)
2. Disc Deck
This is the place you insert or eject the
CD. When the ignition switch of the auto-
mobile is set to ACC (1st notch) or ON
(2nd notch), if you push the disc in, the
power will be turned on and the CD will
be played. The CD player can play both
12cm and 8cm audio discs. if you insert
a video CD or Data CD then the LCD will
display "ERROR7" and it will turn to the
previous mode (radio or XM).
✽✽NOTICE
Make sure the printed side of the disk
faces upward when you insert the disk.
3. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
It displays the state of the song currently
played as well as the information of the
disc including the track, number, CD,
RPT, RDM, SCAN, runtime, and EQ
mode (CLASSIC, POP, ROCK, JAZZ).
4. Disc Eject Button
Press this button to eject the disk when
the disk is in the deck. If no CD is in the
deck, LCD will display “NO DISC” for 3
seconds. (The disk will be ejected when
you press this button even when the igni-
tion switch (ACC) of the automobile is set
to OFF or when the power of the audio
system is off.)
✽✽NOTICE
Forced Eject: When you press and hold
this button for more than 3 seconds, the
disk will be ejected by all means. (Use
this function only when the disk is not
ejected in the abnormal state.)
5. CD Indicator
This indicator light will be on if the CD is
inside the deck whether the audio sys-
tem is on or off if the ignition switch of the
automobile is set to ACC (1st notch) or
ON (2nd notch). This light will go off
when the CD is ejected.
6. SCAN Button
When you press this button, the player
will play 10 seconds of each track (LCD
will display “SCAN”). Press it again to
cancel scanning.
7. Search / Selection Button
Turn the search control to the left or right
while playing CD then the track number
on the LCD will change correspondingly.
When you find the track you want to lis-
ten to, press the button to play the select-
ed song. (The search will be canceled
when you do not select the track within 5
seconds after searching the track.)
8. RDM(Random) Button
Press this button to play the songs in ran-
dom order regardless of the order of
tracks (LCD will display “RDM”). Press it
again to cancel random play.
4117
Features of your vehicle
9. RPT Button
This lets you listen to the song or CD you
like repeatedly. Simply press this button
when the song or the CD you want to
repeat is played.(LCD will display “RPT”)
Press this button again to cancel repeti-
tion.
10. Fast Forward/Rewind Button
Press and hold "FF" button while the CD
is played to quickly search through the
latter part of the song and "REW", the
front part. When you release the button,
the song will be played from current posi-
tion.
11. Track Move (Track Up/Down)
Button
• Press [ ] (Track Up) button while
playing CD to play from the beginning
of the next song. (If you hold this but-
ton, it will continue to move to the next
song.)
• Press [ ] (Track Down) button while
playing CD to move to the beginning of
the song and press again to move to
the beginning of the previous song. (If
you hold this button, it will continue to
move to the previous song.)
12. Information Button
If the song title is long while playing an
MP3 file, press this button to scroll the
song title to the end.
13. FOLDER Name Search Button
Press "FLDR "(Folder Up) button while
playing an MP3 file to display the next
available folder name and "FLDR
"(Folder Down) button, the previous folder
name. Find the folder you searched for
and press 7 to play the songs inside the
folder from the top of the list. (If you do not
take any action after searching for the
folder for 5 or more seconds, this search
will be canceled.)
14. Mark / Memory Button
You can choose only the songs you want
to listen to and play them in respective
order. (Refer to the operation method.)
Press again to cancel.
Features of your vehicle
1184
1. XM Selector
2. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
3. SCAN Button
4. Information Button
5. Channel Move (Seek Up/Down) Button
6. Preset Memory Button
7. Category Search (Fast Up/Down) Button
8. Channel Search Control and Selector
HD445XM
XM (SATELLITE RADIO) PART
4119
Features of your vehicle
1. XM Selector
• This is XM selector and it will turn to
each mode in the following order each
time you press the button.
- XM1 XM2 XM3
• When you press this button when you
are listening to CD or RADIO, the sys-
tem will automatically turn to XM
mode.
• When ignition switch of the automobile
is set to ACC (1st notch) or ON (2nd
notch) and when you press this button,
XM will be on even when the audio
system was turned off.
2. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
It displays the XM1, XM2, XM3, Preset
Number, Title of the Channel Received,
EQ Mode (CLASSIC, POP, ROCK,
JAZZ), and SCAN Status when listening
to XM.
3. SCAN Button
When you press this button, the player
will play 10 seconds of each channel
(LCD will display "SCAN"). Press it again
to cancel scanning. Also, press and this
button for more than 0.8 seconds to play
the channels memorized to the preset
buttons for 10 seconds each. (LCD will
display "corresponding channel number",
"<P>", and "SCAN".) Press it again to
cancel scanning.
4. Information Button
You can see the information of the chan-
nel currently received and you can switch
to different information by pressing this
button in the following order.
- Title Name Category Current
State
5. Channel Move (Seek Up/Down)
Button
• When you press this button, the chan-
nel will move automatically and stop at
the next available channel and play the
channel. The display will cycle once
through the Channel, Title, Name and
Category for selected channel.
(Press [ ] to move to the higher fre-
quencies, press [ ] to the lower fre-
quencies automatically.)
Press and hold either the down or up at
a fast rate. The display will show the
Channel Name and Number while tun-
ing at the fast rate.
• Radio ID :Seek or tune to XM channel
0 to display the Radio ID.
6. Preset Memory Button
Press this button and hold for less than
0.8 seconds to listen to the channel
memorized to the button. Also, when you
are listening to the channel other than
the channel memorized to the button
using TUNE or SEEK, press the button
you wish to memorize current channel to
and hold for more than 0.8 seconds until
it beeps to memorize the channel.
Features of your vehicle
1204
7. Category Search Button
Press this button to search another cate-
gory while listening to current channel
(LCD will display "CAT"). (Press [ ] to
search in the higher categories and [ ],
lower categories. Press 8 when you want
to choose the category you want and the
system will receive the channel on the
top of the list in the selected category.)
8. Channel Search Control and
Selector
While listening to XM broadcast, rotate
this control to the right or left to search
other channels while listening to current
channel. (Turn to the right to search
higher channels and left, lower channels.
When you find the channel you want,
press the button to select the channel.)
✽✽NOTICE
Rotate this control to right or left during
category search, the LCD will display
"<C>" and press this button to select
the channel you want within the catego-
ry you want.
4121
Features of your vehicle
HD466XM
1. Power Button and Volume Control
2. Automatic Channel Seek Button (SEEK)
3. Preset Memory Button
4. Manual Channel Select & Sound Quality
Control
5. SCAN Button
6. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
7. Radio Band (FM/AM) Selection Button
RADIO PART
Features of your vehicle
1224
1. Power Button and Volume
Control
• Used for turning on/off the audio sys-
tem.
• Press this button when using the audio
system to turn off the power.
• Turn the volume control clockwise to
increase volume and counterclock-
wise, to decrease. (The volume level is
displayed when adjusting the volume.)
2. Automatic Channel Seek
Button (SEEK)
Press this button to automatically find
and tune to next available channel.
(Press [ ] to automatically seek next
available channel in higher frequencies
and [ ] in lower frequencies.)
✽✽NOTICE
If the channel is not received well, use
the manual control (4).
3. Preset Memory Button
Press this button and hold for less than
0.8 seconds to easily listen to the channel
memorized to the button. Also, when you
are listening to the channel other than the
channel memorized to the button using
TUNE or SEEK, press the button you
wish to memorize current channel to and
hold for more than 0.8 seconds until it
beeps to memorize the channel.
4. Manual Channel Select &
Sound Quality Control
• When listening to a radio channel,
rotate this control to manually adjust
the frequency. Turn this control to the
right to increase the frequency and left,
to decrease.
• This selects all functions related with
audio quality.
• When listening to the audio system,
press this button to select following
sound qualities in respective order.
- BASS MIDDLE TREBLE
FADER BALANCE
EQUALIZER Current State
• Rotate the control to adjust the sound
mode when adjusting sound quality.
5. SCAN Button
Press this button to tune to all available
channels for 5 seconds each. (LCD will
display "SCAN") Press the button once
again to cancel scanning.
6. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
It displays the state of the system when
listening to the radio such as AM, FM1,
FM2, Stereo(ST), preset number, fre-
quency received, EQ mode (CLASSIC,
POP, ROCK, JAZZ) and SCAN status.
7. Radio Band (FM/AM) Selection
Button
• This selects FM/AM and the radio
band will change in the following order
every time you press the button.
- FM1 FM2 AM
• Press this button when CD or XM is on
to automatically change to radio mode.
• If the ignition switch of the automobile
is set to ACC (1st notch) or ON (2nd
notch), the system will be turned on
and automatically play the radio when
you press this button even if the power
of the audio system is off.
4123
Features of your vehicle
1. CD/AUX Selector
2. Disc Deck
3. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
4. Disc Eject Button
5. Disc Move (Disc Up/Down) Button
6. SCAN Button
7. Search / Selection Button
8. RDM(Random) Button
9. RPT(Repeat) Button
10. Fast Forward/Rewind Button
11. Track Move (Track Up/Down) Button
12. Information Button
13. FOLDER Name Search Button
14. Mark / Memory Button
15. Disc Load /All Load Button
HD466XM
CD PLAYER PART
Features of your vehicle
1244
1. CD/AUX Selector
• The system will start playing the CD
when you press this button while C186
radio or XM is on. (If no CD is found,
the LCD will display "NO DISC" for 3
seconds.)
• If the ignition switch of the automobile
is set to ACC (1st notch) or ON (2nd
notch), the system will be turned on
and automatically play the CD from the
last played part when you press this
button even if the power of the audio
system is off (However, only when the
disc is placed inside the system)
2. Disc Deck
This is the place you insert or eject the
CD. To open the deck, press [LOAD] but-
ton. This CD changer can only play audio
CD/MP3/WMA discs and 12cm discs.
Also, if you insert a video CD or a DATA
CD then the LCD will display "ERROR7"
and it will turn to the previous mode
(radio or XM). When the ignition switch of
the automobile is set to ACC (1st notch)
or ON (2nd notch), if you press [LOAD]
button the power will be on and you will
be able to insert the disc even when the
audio system's power is off.
✽✽NOTICE
• Do not use 8cm discs.
• The system will not play AAC/WAVE
formats.
• Make sure the printed side of the disk
faces upward when you insert the
disk.
3. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
It displays the state of the song currently
played as well as the information of the
disc including the track, number, CD,
RPT, RDM, SCAN, runtime, EQ mode
(CLASSIC, POP, ROCK, JAZZ), READ-
ING, WAIT, INSERT, NO DISC and so
forth.
4. Disc Eject Button
Press this button to eject the disk when
the disk is in the deck. If no CD is in the
deck, LCD will display “NO DISC” for 3
seconds. (The disk will be ejected when
you press this button even when the igni-
tion switch (ACC) of the automobile is set
to OFF or when the power of the audio
system is off.)
✽✽NOTICE
ALL EJECT: Press and hold this button
for more than 0.8 seconds to eject all
discs inside the deck in respective order.
5. Disc Move (Disc Up/Down)
Button
If you want to listen to another disk while
using the CD changer, press [DISC ] ,
[DISC ] button to move to the disc you
want to listent to and play the disc. If all 6
decks of the changer is not full, the num-
ber of the empty deck will not be select-
ed but only the decks with discs will be
played. When moving through discs, the
selected disc will be displayed as "U."
6. SCAN Button
When you press this button, the player
will play 10 seconds of each track (LCD
will display “SCAN”). Press it again to
cancel scanning.
7. Search / Selection Button
Turn the search control to the left or right
while playing CD then the track number
on the LCD will change correspondingly.
When you find the track you want to lis-
ten to, press the button to play the select-
ed song. (The search will be canceled
when you do not select the track within 5
seconds after searching the track.)
4125
Features of your vehicle
8. RDM(Random) Button
Press this button to play the songs in ran-
dom order regardless of the order of
tracks (LCD will display “RDM”). Press it
again to cancel random play.
9. RPT(Repeat) Button
This lets you listen to the song or CD you
like repeatedly. Simply press this button
when the song or the CD you want to
repeat is played. Press this button again
to cancel repetition
• Less than 0.8 seconds: Repeats 1 song
or 1 file (LCD will display “RPT”)
• 0.8 seconds or longer: Repeats 1 DISC
only (LCD will display “ALL RPT”)
10. Fast Forward/Rewind Button
Press and hold “FF” button while the CD
is played to quickly search through the
latter part of the song and “REW”, the
front part. When you release the button,
the song will be played from current posi-
tion.
11. Track Move (Track Up/Down)
Button
• Press [ ](Track Up) button while play-
ing CD to play from the beginning of the
next song. (If you hold this button, it will
continue to move to the next song.)
• Press [ ](Track Down) button while
playing CD to move to the beginning of
the song and press again to move to
the beginning of the previous song. (If
you hold this button, it will continue to
move to the previous song.)
12. Information Button
If the song title is long while playing an
MP3 file, press this button to scroll the
song title to the end.
13. FOLDER Name Search Button
Press [FLDR ](Folder Up) button while
playing an MP3 file to display the next
available folder name and [FLDR
](Folder Down) button, the previous folder
name. Find the folder you searched for
and press 7 to play the songs inside the
folder from the top of the list. (If you do
not take any action after searching for the
folder for 5 or more seconds, this search
will be canceled.)
14. Mark / Memory Button
You can choose only the songs you want
to listen to and play them in respective
order. (Refer to the operation method.)
Press again to cancel.
15. Disc Load /All Load Button
When you press [LOAD] button, one of
the empty slots of the CD changer will be
opened in the order of (1), (2), (3), (4), (5)
Insert the CD when the word "INSERT"
on LCD and the light of the deck flicker
then the deck will be closed you will be
able to play and listen to the correspon-
ding CD. Also, you can load all 6 CDs to
all empty slots of the changer when you
press the [LOAD] button for more than 0.8
seconds in respective order. In this case
the CD you loaded last will be played. If
you do not load CD for 10 seconds after
pressing the [LOAD] button, or press the
[LOAD] button once again, the loading
will be canceled. In this case, the display
for empty disc slots will go off, and it will
be displayed again when the slot is
loaded with a disc.
✽✽NOTICE
• Insert CD only when the word
"INSERT" on the LCD and the light
of the deck flicker. (Insert CDs one by
one in respective order.)
• In other cases, the CD will not be
inserted (CD DOOR will be closed),
and if you try to insert CD by force it
may cause damage to the audio sys-
tem.
Features of your vehicle
1264
1. XM Selector
2. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
3. SCAN Button
4. Information Button
5. Channel Move (Seek Up/Down) Button
6. Preset Memory Button
7. Category Search (Fast Up/Down) Button
8. Channel Search Control and Selector
HD466XM
XM (SATELLITE RADIO) PART
4127
Features of your vehicle
1. XM Selector
• This is XM selector and it will turn to
each mode in the following order each
time you press the button.
- XM1 XM2 XM3
• When you press this button when you
are listening to CD or RADIO, the sys-
tem will automatically turn to XM
mode.
• When ignition switch of the automobile
is set to ACC (1st notch) or ON (2nd
notch) and when you press this button,
XM will be on even when the audio
system was turned off.
2. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
It displays the XM1, XM2, XM3, Preset
Number, Title of the Channel Received,
EQ Mode (CLASSIC, POP, ROCK,
JAZZ), and SCAN Status when listening
to XM.
3. SCAN Button
When you press this button, the player
will play 10 seconds of each channel
(LCD will display "SCAN"). Press it again
to cancel scanning. Also, press and this
button for more than 0.8 seconds to play
the channels memorized to the preset
buttons for 10 seconds each. (LCD will
display "corresponding channel number",
"<P>", and "SCAN".) Press it again to
cancel scanning.
4. Information Button
You can see the information of the chan-
nel currently received and you can switch
to different information by pressing this
button in the following order.
- Title Name Category Current
State
5. Channel Move (Seek Up/Down)
Button
• When you press this button, the chan-
nel will move automatically and stop at
the next available channel and play the
channel. The display will cycle once
through the Channel, Title, Name and
Category for selected channel.
(Press [ ] to move to the higher fre-
quencies, press [ ] to the lower fre-
quencies automatically.)
Press and hold either the down or up at
a fast rate. The display will show the
Channel Name and Number while tun-
ing at the fast rate.
• Radio ID :Seek or tune to XM channel
0 to display the Radio ID.
6. Preset Memory Button
Press this button and hold for less than
0.8 seconds to listen to the channel
memorized to the button. Also, when you
are listening to the channel other than
the channel memorized to the button
using TUNE or SEEK, press the button
you wish to memorize current channel to
and hold for more than 0.8 seconds until
it beeps to memorize the channel.
Features of your vehicle
1284
7. Category Search Button
Press this button to search another cate-
gory while listening to current channel
(LCD will display "CAT"). (Press [ ] to
search in the higher categories and [ ],
lower categories. Press 8 when you want
to choose the category you want and the
system will receive the channel on the
top of the list in the selected category.)
8. Channel Search Control and
Selector
While listening to XM broadcast, rotate
this control to the right or left to search
other channels while listening to current
channel. (Turn to the right to search
higher channels and left, lower channels.
When you find the channel you want,
press the button to select the channel.)
✽✽NOTICE
Rotate this control to right or left during
category search, the LCD will display
"<C>" and press this button to select
the channel you want within the catego-
ry you want.
5
Before driving / 5-3
Key positions / 5-4
Starting the engine / 5-5
Manual transaxle / 5-7
Automatic transaxle / 5-10
Brake system / 5-16
Cruise control system / 5-26
Economical operation / 5-30
Special driving conditions / 5-32
Winter driving / 5-35
Trailer towing / 5-39
Vehicle load limit / 5-47
Weight of the vehicle / 5-52
Driving your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
25
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win-
dows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia-
tion.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear
a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the
exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your
garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area
with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
If you must drive with the trunk lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are
kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
53
Driving your vehicle
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid. Further details are provided in
Section 7, “Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are famil-
iar with your vehicle and its equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
All passengers must be properly
belted whenever the vehicle is mov-
ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section
3 for more information on their
proper use.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people,
especially children, before putting a
car into “Drive” or “Reverse”.
PROPOSITION 65 WARN-
ING
Engine exhaust and a wide variety
of automobile components and
parts, including components found
in the interior furnishings in a vehi-
cle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component
wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
Driving your vehicle
45
Illuminated ignition switch
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will be illuminated for your
convenience, provided the ignition switch
is not in the ON position. The light will go
off immediately when the ignition switch
is turned on or go off after about 30 sec-
onds when the door is closed.
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, push the key inward at
the ACC position and turn the key toward
the LOCK position.
OUN036001 OUN036002
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Drunk driving is the number one
contributor to the highway death
toll each year. Even a small amount
of alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgement.
Driving while under the influence of
drugs is as dangerous or more dan-
gerous than driving drunk.
You are much more likely to have a
serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking drugs,
don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-
er who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver
or call a cab.
KEY POSITIONS
55
Driving your vehicle
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-
trical accessories are operative.
✽✽NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced in turning the
ignition key to the ACC position, turn
the steering wheel right and left to
release the tension and then turn the
key.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is the
normal running position after the engine
is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the
engine is not running to prevent battery
discharge.
START
Turn the ignition key to the START posi-
tion to start the engine. The engine will
crank until you release the key; then it
returns to the ON position. The brake
warning lamp can be checked in this
position.
Starting the gasoline engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
WARNING - Ignition key
• Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is
moving. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
• The anti-theft steering column lock
is not a substitute for the parking
brake. Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the shift
lever is engaged in P (Park) for the
automatic transaxle and set the
parking brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and sud-
den vehicle movement may occur
if these precautions are not taken.
• Never reach for the ignition switch,
or any other controls through the
steering wheel while the vehicle is
in motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area could
cause a loss of vehicle control, an
accident and serious bodily injury
or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver’s seat as they
may move while driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an acci-
dent.
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with your
ability to use the brake and acceler-
ator pedal, and the clutch (if
equipped).
STARTING THE ENGINE
Driving your vehicle
65
3. Turn the ignition switch to START and
hold it there until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then
release the key.
4. In extremely cold weather (below
0°F / -18°C) or after the vehicle has
not been operated for several days, let
the engine warm up without depress-
ing the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
CAUTION
Do not engage the starter for more
than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls
or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds
before re-engaging the starter.
Improper use of the starter may
damage it.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the vehicle
is still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
57
Driving your vehicle
Manual transaxle operation
The manual transaxle has 5 forward
gears.
This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift
knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized
in all forward gears so shifting to either a
higher or a lower gear is easily accom-
plished.
Press the clutch pedal down fully while
shifting, then release it slowly.
The gearshift lever must be returned to
the neutral position before shifting into R
(Reverse). The ring located immediately
below the shift knob must be pulled
upward while moving the shift lever to the
R position.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
OHD056002
The ring (1) must be pulled up while moving the shift lever.
The shift lever can be moved without pulling the ring (1).
Driving your vehicle
85
• To shift into reverse, rest the lever in
neutral for at least 3 seconds after your
car is completely stopped. Then move
the lever into the reverse position.
• During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transaxle lubricant has
warmed up. This is normal and not
harmful to the transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop and
it's hard to shift into 1st or R (Reverse),
put the shift lever in N (Neutral) posi-
tion and release the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down, and then shift
into 1st or R (Reverse) gear position.
CAUTION
• When downshifting from fifth
gear to fourth gear, caution
should be taken not to inadver-
tently press the gear shift lever
sideways in such a manner that
second gear is engaged. Such a
drastic downshift may cause the
engine speed to increase to the
point that the tachometer will
enter the red-zone. Such over-
revving of the engine may possi-
bly cause engine damage.
• Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear when
the engine is running at high
speed (5,000 RPM or higher).
Such a downshifting may damage
the engine.
CAUTION
• To avoid premature clutch wear
and damage, do not drive with
your foot resting on the clutch
pedal. Also, don’t use the clutch
to hold the vehicle stopped on an
uphill grade, while waiting for a
traffic light, etc.
• Do not use the shift lever as a
handrest during driving, as this
can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks.
WARNING
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off. Then make
sure the transaxle is shifted into 1st
gear when the vehicle is parked on
a level or uphill grade, and shifted
into R (Reverse) on a downhill
grade. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur if
these precautions are not followed
in the order identified.
59
Driving your vehicle
Using the clutch
The clutch should be pressed all the way
to the floor before shifting, then released
slowly.The clutch pedal should always be
fully released while driving. Do not rest
your foot on the clutch pedal while driv-
ing. This can cause unnecessary wear.
Do not partially engage the clutch to hold
the car on an incline. This causes unnec-
essary wear. Use the foot brake or park-
ing brake to hold the car on an incline. Do
not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and
repeatedly.
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traf-
fic or while driving up steep hills, down-
shift before the engine starts to labor.
Downshifting reduces the chance of
stalling and gives better acceleration
when you again need to increase your
speed. When the vehicle is traveling
down steep hills, downshifting helps
maintain safe speed and prolongs brake
life.
Good driving practices
• Never take the car out of gear and
coast down a hill. This is extremely
hazardous. Always leave the car in
gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause
them to overheat and malfunction.
Instead, when you are driving down a
long hill, slow down and shift to a lower
gear. When you do this, engine braking
will help slow the car.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. This will help avoid over-revving
the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross
winds. This gives you much better con-
trol of your car.
• Be sure the car is completely stopped
before you attempt to shift into reverse.
The transaxle can be damaged if you
do not. To shift into reverse, depress
the clutch, move the shift lever to neu-
tral, wait three seconds, then shift to
the reverse position.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
Driving your vehicle
105
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
OHD056003
The shift lever can be moved freely
Depress the brake pedal when shifting
511
Driving your vehicle
Automatic transaxle operation
The highly efficient automatic transaxle
has 4 forward speeds and one reverse
speed. The individual speeds are select-
ed automatically, depending on the posi-
tion of the shift lever.
All normal forward driving is done with
the shift lever in the D (Drive) position.
To move the shift lever from the P (Park)
position, the brake pedal must be
depressed with the ignition switch ON.
✽✽NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if
the battery has been disconnected, may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and the shifting sequence will
adjust after shifts are cycled a few times
by the TCM (Transaxle Control
Module).
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
putting a car into D (Drive) or R
(Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order iden-
tified.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on.
• When stopped on an upgrade, do
not hold the vehicle stationary
with engine power. Use the serv-
ice brake or the parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
Driving your vehicle
125
Transaxle ranges
The indicator lights in the instrument
cluster indicate the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position locks
the transaxle and prevents the front
wheels from rotating.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not locked.
The vehicle will roll freely even on the
slightest incline unless the parking brake
or service brakes are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving posi-
tion. The transaxle will automatically shift
through a 4-gear sequence, providing the
best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator fully, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear.
(Continued)
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position. Set the
parking brake fully, shut the
engine off and take the key with
you. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur if
you do not follow these precau-
tions in the order specified.
• Never leave a child unattended in
a vehicle.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever
is latched in the P (Park) position
and set the parking brake fully.
(Continued)
CAUTION
The transaxle may be damaged if
you shift into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R while
the vehicle is in motion, except as
explained in “Rocking the Vehicle”,
in this manual.
513
Driving your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
Alwqys come to a complete stop before
shifting into D (Drive).
3 (Third gear)
Use for towing a trailer during hill climb-
ing or to use engine braking downhill.
"3" automatically shifts between 1st, 2nd
and 3rd gears. This means that no shift-
up to 4th gear is performed. However, the
shift-up to 4th gear is done when the car
speed exceeds a certain value to prevent
the engine from over-revving. Manually
move the selector to "D" when returning
to normal driving condition.
2 (Second gear)
Use for driving on a slippery road, hill
climbing or engine braking downhill. "2"
automatically shifts between first and
second gears.
This means that no shift-up to 3rd gear is
performed. However, the shift-up to third
gear is done when the car speed
exceeds a certain value to prevent the
engine from over-revving. Manually move
the selector to "D" returning to normal
driving condition.
L (Low gear)
Use for driving up a very steep grade or
for engine braking when descending
steep hills. When downshifting to "L", the
transaxle will temporarily remain in sec-
ond gear until the vehicle has slowed
enough for low gear to engage. Do not
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) in low gear.
"L" shifts to 1st gear only. However, shift
up to 2nd is performed when the car
exceeds a certain speed and, as speed
increases, the transaxle will shift up to
3rd gear to prevent over-revving the
engine.
✽✽NOTICE
• For smooth and safe operation,
depress the brake pedal when shifting
from "N" (Neutral) position or "P"
(Park) position to a forward or "R"
(Reverse) gear.
• Fully depress the brake pedal in order
to move the shift lever from the "P"
(Park) position to any of the other
positions.
• It is always possible to shift from "R",
"N", "D", "3", "2", "L" position to
"P" position. The vehicle must be
fully stopped to avoid transaxle dam-
age.
CAUTION
• Shift into "R" and "P" position
only when the vehicle has com-
pletely stopped.
• Do not accelerate the engine in
reverse or any of the forward
positions with the brakes applied.
• Always apply the footbrake when
shifting from "P" or "N", to "R",
"D","3", "2" or "L" position.
• Check the automatic transaxle
fluid level regularly, and add fluid
as necessary.
See the maintenance schedule for
the proper fluid recommendation.
Driving your vehicle
145
Shift lock system
For your safety, the automatic transaxle
has a shift lock system which prevents
shifting the transaxle out of P (Park)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle out of P (Park):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, then do the following:
1. Carefully remove the cap (1) covering
the shift-lock override access hole.
2. Insert a screwdriver (or key) into the
access hole and press down on the
screwdriver (or key).
3. Move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Hyundai dealer immediate-
ly.
Ignition key interlock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position. If the ignition switch is in any
other position, the key cannot be
removed.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting out
of the P (Park) position into anoth-
er position to avoid inadvertent
motion of the vehicle which could
injure persons in or around the car.
OHD056004
515
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
• Never move the gear selector lever
from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to any
other position with the accelerator
pedal depressed.
• Never move the gear selector lever into
"P" when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the car is completely stopped
before you attempt to shift into R
(Reverse).
• Never take the car out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave the
car in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunc-
tion. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, slow down and shift to
a lower gear. When you do this, engine
braking will help slow the car.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transaxle in P
(Park) to keep the car from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelera-
tor pedal.
Moving up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start
To move up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
CAUTION
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may
attempt to rock the vehicle free by
moving it forward and backward. Do
not attempt this procedure if people
or objects are anywhere near the
vehicle. During the rocking opera-
tion the vehicle may suddenly move
forward of backward as it becomes
unstuck, causing injury or damage
to nearby people or objects.
Driving your vehicle
165
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you nor-
mally would. The stopping distance, how-
ever, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when neces-
sary to maintain steering control on slip-
pery surfaces.
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
BRAKE SYSTEM
(Continued)
• When descending a long or steep
hill, shift to a lower gear and
avoid continuous application of
the brakes. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking per-
formance.
• Wet brakes may result in the vehi-
cle not slowing down at the usual
rate and/or pulling to one side
when the brakes are applied.
Applying the brakes lightly will
indicate whether they have been
affected in this way. Always test
your brakes in this fashion after
driving through deep water. To
dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
WARNING - Parking brake
Applying the parking brake while
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden loss of
control of the vehicle. If you must
use the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormal high brake tem-
peratures, excessive brake lining
and pad wear, and increased
stopping distances.
(Continued)
517
Driving your vehicle
Disc brakes wear indicator
Your vehicle has disc brakes.
When your brake pads are worn and new
pads are required, you will hear a high-
pitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes (if equipped). You
may hear this sound come and go or it
may occur whenever you depress the
brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving con-
ditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when you first apply (or lightly
apply) the brakes. This is normal and
does not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
Rear drum brakes (if equipped)
Your rear drum brakes do not have wear
indicators.Therefore, have the rear brake
linings inspected if you hear a rear brake
rubbing noise. Also have your rear
brakes inspected each time you change
or rotate your tires and when you have
the front brakes replaced.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service.
If you ignore this audible warning,
you will eventually lose braking
performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
• Always replace brake pads as
complete front or rear axle sets.
Driving your vehicle
185
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then without pressing
the release button in, pull the parking
brake lever up as far as possible. In addi-
tion it is recommended that when parking
the vehicle on a gradient, the shift lever
should be positioned in the appropriate
low gear on manual transaxle vehicles or
in the P (Park) position on automatic
transaxle vehicles.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and pull the parking brake
lever slightly. Secondly, depress the
release button and lower the parking
brake lever while holding the button.
CAUTION
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive brake
pad (or lining) and brake rotor wear.
WARNING
• To prevent unintentional move-
ment when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the
gearshift lever in place of the
parking brake. Set the parking
brake AND make sure the
gearshift lever is securely posi-
tioned in 1st (First) gear or R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle
equipped vehicles and in P (Park)
for automatic transaxle equipped
vehicles.
• Never allow a person who is unfa-
miliar with the vehicle or children
to touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released unin-
tentionally, serious injury may
occur.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the car which
can injure occupants or pedestri-
ans.
OHD056005 OHD056006
519
Driving your vehicle
Check the brake warning light by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). This light will be illuminated
when the parking brake is applied with
the ignition switch in the START or ON
position.
Before driving, be sure the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning
light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released, there
may be a malfunction in the brake sys-
tem. Immediate attention is necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-
cle immediately. If that is not possible,
use extreme caution while operating the
vehicle and only continue to drive the
vehicle until you can reach a safe loca-
tion or repair shop.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
(if equipped)
W-75
WARNING
ABS (ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or danger-
ous driving maneuvers. Even
though vehicle control is improved
during emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance between
you and objects ahead. Vehicle
speeds should always be reduced
during extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for cars
equipped with an anti-lock braking
system (Electronic Stability Control
System) may be longer than for
those without it in the following
road conditions.
During these conditions the vehicle
should be driven at reduced
speeds:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads.
• With tire chains installed.
• On roads where the road surface
is pitted or has different surface
height.
(Continued)
(Continued)
The safety features of an ABS
(ESC) equipped vehicle should not
be tested by high speed driving or
cornering. This could endanger the
safety of yourself or others.
Driving your vehicle
205
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going to
lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-
lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situa-
tion, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the situa-
tion warrants and allow the ABS to con-
trol the force being delivered to the
brakes.
✽✽NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the anti-lock brake system
is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from exces-
sive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping dis-
tance than for vehicles equipped with a
conventional brake system.
W-78
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS. In this case, howev-
er, your regular brakes will work
normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay on
for approximately 3 seconds after
the ignition switch is ON. During
that time, the ABS will go through
self-diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS. Contact
an authorized Hyundai dealer as
soon as possible.
521
Driving your vehicle
✽✽NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean your
ABS is malfunctioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
Electronic stability control (ESC)
(If equipped)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is designed to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering manuevers. ESC checks
where you are steering and where the
vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the
brakes at individual wheels and
intervenes in the engine management
system to stabilize the vehicle.
CAUTION
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operate your brakes continu-
ously, the ABS will be active con-
tinuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your car
over to a safe place and stop the
engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a prob-
lem with the ABS. Contact an
authorized Hyundai dealer as
soon as possible.
WARNING
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when cor-
nering. Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) will not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers and hydroplaning on
wet surfaces can still result in seri-
ous accidents. Only a safe and
attentive driver can prevent acci-
dents by avoiding maneuvers that
cause the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESC installed, always fol-
low all the normal precautions for
driving - including driving at safe
speeds for the conditions.
OHD056007N
Driving your vehicle
225
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is an electronic system designed
to help the driver maintain vehicle control
under adverse conditions. It is not a
substitute for safe driving practices.
Factors including speed, road conditions
and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in
preventing a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ESC is active.
✽✽NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the Electronic Stability
Control System is functioning properly.
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-
cator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button
for at least half a second after
turning the ignition ON to turn
ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator
will illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC OFF
button (ESC OFF indicator
light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESC per-
forming an automatic system
self-check and does not indi-
cate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in operation,
ESC indicator light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Control is operating properly,
you can feel a slight pulsation
in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indi-
cates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud
or slippery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm (revo-
lutions per minute) to
increase.
-
ESC
523
Driving your vehicle
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
• To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF indicator light illu-
minates).
• If the ignition switch is turned
to LOCK position when ESC
is off, ESC remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the
ESC will automatically turn
on again.
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON, the
indicator light illuminates, then goes off if
ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever
ESC is operating.
ESC OFF indicator light comes on when
either the ESC is turned off with the but-
ton, or ESC fails to operate when turned
on.
ESC
OFF
ESC
ESC
OFF
■ESC indicator light (blinks)
■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the ESC system to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Control sys-
tem is only a driving aid; use pre-
cautions for safe driving by slowing
down on curved, snowy, or icy
roads. Drive slowly and don’t
attempt to accelerate whenever the
ESC indicator light is blinking, or
when the road surface is slippery.
Driving your vehicle
245
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC turned
on for daily driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press the
ESC OFF button while driving on a flat
road surface.
Never press ESC OFF button while ESC
is operating (ESC indicator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is operat-
ing, the vehicle may slip out of control.
✽✽NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is
turned off (ESC OFF light illuminat-
ed). If the ESC is left on, it may pre-
vent the vehicle speed from increas-
ing, and result in false diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or brake system operation.
Good braking practices
• After being parked, check to be sure
the parking brake is not engaged and
that the parking brake indicator light is
out before driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the car is washed. Wet brakes
can be dangerous! Your car will not
stop as quickly if the brakes are wet.
Wet brakes may cause the car to pull
to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns to
normal, taking care to keep the car
under control at all times. If the braking
action does not return to normal, stop
as soon as it is safe to do so and call
an authorized Hyundai dealer for
assistance.
• Don't coast down hills with the car out
of gear. This is extremely hazardous.
Keep the car in gear at all times, use
the brakes to slow down, then shift to a
lower gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
WARNING
Never press the ESC OFF button
while ESC is operating.
If the ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may go out of
control.
To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
525
Driving your vehicle
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting
your foot on the brake pedal while driv-
ing can be dangerous because it can
result in the brakes overheating and
losing their effectiveness. It also
increases the wear of the brake com-
ponents.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,
apply the brakes gently and keep the
car pointed straight ahead while you
slow down. When you are moving
slowly enough for it to be safe to do so,
pull off the road and stop in a safe
place.
• If your car is equipped with an auto-
matic transaxle, don't let your car
creep forward. To avoid creeping for-
ward, keep your foot firmly on the
brake pedal when the car is stopped.
• Use caution when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the gear selector lever in "P"
(automatic transaxle) or in first or
reverse gear (manual transaxle). If
your car is facing downhill, turn the
front wheels into the curb to help keep
the car from rolling. If your car is facing
uphill, turn the front wheels away from
the curb to help keep the car from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to keep
the car from rolling, block the wheels.
• Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged posi-
tion. This is most likely to happen when
there is an accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if the
brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only
temporarily while you put the gear
selector lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the car cannot roll. Then
release the parking brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade
with the accelerator pedal. This can
cause the transaxle to overheat.
Always use the brake pedal or parking
brake.
Driving your vehicle
265
The cruise control system allows you to
program the vehicle to maintain a con-
stant speed without pressing the acceler-
ator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
✽✽NOTICE
During normal cruise control operation,
when the SET switch is activated or
reactivated after applying the brakes,
the cruise control will energize after
approximately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
To set cruise control speed:
1. Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button on
the steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 25 mph (40 km/h).
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated)
the cruise control can be
switched on accidentally. Keep
the cruise control system off
(CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the cruise control is not in
use, to avoid inadvertently set-
ting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system
only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to keep
the car at a constant speed, for
instance, driving in heavy or
varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or
winding roads or over 6% up-hill
or down-hill roads.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the cruise control system.
• During cruise-speed driving of a
manual transaxle vehicle, do not
shift into neutral without
depressing the clutch pedal,
since the engine will be over-
revved. If this happens, depress
the clutch pedal or release the
cruise control ON/OFF switch. OHD056010L
527
Driving your vehicle
3. Push the COAST/SET switch, and
release it at the desired speed. The SET
indicator light in the instrument cluster
will illuminate. Release the accelerator
at the same time.The desired speed will
automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
momentarily slow down while going down-
hill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the RES/ACCEL switch and hold
it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Release
the switch at the speed you want.
• Push the RES/ACCEL switch and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
each time the RES/ACCEL switch is
operated in this manner.
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the COAST/SET switch and hold
it. Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the switch at the speed
you want to maintain.
• Push the COAST/SET switch and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 1 mph (1.6
km/h) each time the COAST/SET
switch is operated in this manner.
OHD056011L OHD056012L OHD056011L
Driving your vehicle
285
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, depress the
accelerator pedal. Increased speed will
not interfere with cruise control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator.
To cancel cruise control, do one
of the following:
• Press the brake pedal.
• Press the clutch pedal with an manual
transaxle.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic
transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch located on
the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than
the memory speed by 9 mph (15
km/h).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 24 mph (40 km/h).
Each of these actions will cancel cruise
control operation (the SET indicator light
in the instrument cluster will go off), but it
will not turn the system off. If you wish to
resume cruise control operation, push
the RES/ACCEL switch located on your
steering wheel. You will return to your
previously preset speed.
OHD056013L
529
Driving your vehicle
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h):
If any method other than the CRUISE
ON-OFF switch was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed will
automatically resume when the
RES/ACCEL switch is pushed.
It will not resume, however, if the vehicle
speed has dropped below 25 mph (40
km/h).
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
• Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise con-
trol operation. If you want to resume
cruise control operation, repeat the steps
provided in “To set cruise control speed”
on the previous page.
OHD056012L
Driving your vehicle
305
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
miles (kilometers) you can get from a gal-
lon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle
as economically as possible, use the fol-
lowing driving suggestions to help save
money in both fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-
ate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts
or full-throttle shifts and maintain a
steady cruising speed. Don't race
between stoplights. Try to adjust your
speed to that of the other traffic so you
don't have to change speeds unneces-
sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever
possible. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you can
avoid unnecessary braking. This also
reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster
you drive, the more fuel your car uses.
Driving at a moderate speed, especial-
ly on the highway, is one of the most
effective ways to reduce fuel consump-
tion.
• Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal.
This can increase fuel consumption
and also increase wear on these com-
ponents. In addition, driving with your
foot resting on the brake pedal may
cause the brakes to overheat, which
reduces their effectiveness and may
lead to more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure.
Incorrect inflation, either too much or
too little, results in unnecessary tire
wear. Check the tire pressures at least
once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can
result from hitting curbs or driving too
fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-
ment causes faster tire wear and may
also result in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your car in good condition. For
better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your car
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in Section 7. If you drive your
car in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see Section
7 for details).
• Keep your car clean. For maximum
service, your vehicle should be kept
clean and free of corrosive materials. It
is especially important that mud, dirt,
ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate
on the underside of the car. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel con-
sumption and also contribute to corro-
sion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary
weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel
economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not
in traffic), turn off your engine and
restart only when you're ready to go.
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After the
engine has started, allow the engine to
run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-
ing the vehicle in gear. In very cold
weather, however, give your engine a
slightly longer warm-up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in too
high a gear resulting in the engine
bucking. If this happens, shift to a lower
gear. Over-revving is racing the engine
beyond its safe limit. This can be avoid-
ed by shifting at the recommended
speeds.
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
531
Driving your vehicle
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is operat-
ed by engine power so your fuel econ-
omy is reduced when you use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset some of
this loss, slow down when driving in
these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-
dition is important both for economy and
safety. Therefore, have an authorized
Hyundai dealer perform scheduled
inspections and maintenance.
WARNING - Engine off dur-
ing motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function
properly without the engine run-
ning. Instead, keep the engine on
and downshift to an appropriate
gear for engine braking effect. In
addition, turning off the ignition
while driving could engage the
steering wheel lock resulting in
loss of vehicle steering which
could cause serious injury or
death.
Driving your vehicle
325
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-
tance for braking.
• Avoid sudden movements in braking or
steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes
pump the brake pedal with a light up-
and-down motion until the vehicle is
stopped.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when stalled
in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear
the area around your front wheels. Then,
shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and any forward gear in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transaxle. Do
not race the engine, and spin the wheels
as little as possible. If you are still stuck
after a few tries, have the vehicle pulled
out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine over-
heating and possible damage to the
transaxle.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, while driving on slippery
surfaces can cause an accident.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. Be
careful when downshifting on slip-
pery surfaces.
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transaxle dam-
age or failure, and tire damage.
CAUTION
The ESC system (if equipped)
should be turned OFF prior to rock-
ing the vehicle.
WARNING - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 35 mph (56
km/h). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is station-
ary could cause a tire to overheat
which could result in tire damage
that may injure bystanders.
533
Driving your vehicle
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-
ners, especially when roads are wet.
Ideally, corners should always be taken
under gentle acceleration. If you follow
these suggestions, tire wear will be held
to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and prop-
erly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more diffi-
cult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to read-
just to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not pre-
pared for the slick pavement. Here are a
few things to consider when driving in the
rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windshield wiping equip-
ment in good shape. Replace your
windshield wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tires are in
good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-
ier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking oper-
ation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no high-
er than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
Driving your vehicle
345
Higher speed motoring
Tires:
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pressures
will result in overheating and possible
failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires which
may result in reduced traction or tire fail-
ure.
✽✽NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure shown on the tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to
check both engine coolant and engine
oil.
Drive belt:
A loose or damaged drive belt may result
in overheating of the engine.
WARNING
• Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
Always check the tires for proper
inflation before driving. For prop-
er tire pressures, refer to section
9, “Tires and wheels”.
• Driving on tires with no or insuffi-
cient tread is dangerous. Worn-
out tires can result in loss of
vehicle control, collisions, injury,
and even death. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible and should never be
used for driving. Always check
the tire tread before driving your
car. For further information and
tread limits, refer to section 7,
“Tires and wheels”.
535
Driving your vehicle
The more severe weather conditions of
winter result in greater wear and other
problems. To minimize the problems of
winter driving, you should follow these
suggestions:
Snowy or Icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may
be necessary to use snow tires or to
install tire chains on your tires. If snow
tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and type of the
original equipment tires. Failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and han-
dling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake appli-
cations, and sharp turns are potentially
very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking
to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-
cations on snowy or icy roads may cause
skids to occur. You need to keep suffi-
cient distance between the vehicle in
operation in front and your vehicle. Also,
apply the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tire chains on the tire will
provide a greater driving force, but will
not prevent side skids.
✽✽NOTICE
Tire chains are not legal in all states.
Check state laws before fitting tire
chains.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,
make sure they are radial tires of the
same size and load range as the original
tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels
to balance your vehicle’s handling in all
weather conditions. Keep in mind that the
traction provided by snow tires on dry
roads may not be as high as your vehi-
cle's original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for max-
imum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local, state and municipal regu-
lations for possible restrictions against
their use.
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by mount-
ing some types of snow chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is rec-
ommended instead of snow chains. Do
not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; snow
chains may cause damage to the wheels.
If snow chains must be used, use wire-
type chains with a thickness of less than
0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your vehicle
caused by improper snow chain use is
not covered by your vehicle manufactur-
ers warranty.
Install tire chains only on the front tires.
WINTER DRIVING
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent in
size and type to the vehicle's stan-
dard tires. Otherwise, the safety
and handling of your vehicle may
be adversely affected.
1JBA4068
Driving your vehicle
365
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the manu-
facturer's instructions and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
chains installed. If you hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop and
tighten them. If they still make contact,
slow down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
CAUTION
• Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for your
tires. Incorrect snow chains can
cause damage to the vehicle body
and suspension and may not be
covered by your vehicle manufac-
turer warranty. Also, the snow
chain connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
chains to come loose from the
tire. Make sure the snow chains
are SAE class “S” certified.
• Always check chain installation
for proper mounting after driving
approximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5
to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting.
Retighten or remount the chains
if they are loose.
WARNING
- Mounting chains
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and place
a triangular emergency warning
device behind the vehicle if avail-
able. Always place the vehicle in
park (P), apply the parking brake
and turn off the engine before
installing snow chains.
WARNING - Tire chains
• The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)
or the chain manufacturer’s rec-
ommended speed limit, whichev-
er is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other
road hazards, which may cause
the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-
wheel braking.
• Chains that are the wrong size or
improperly installed can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, sus-
pension, body and wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
537
Driving your vehicle
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant that
should be used because it helps prevent
corrosion in the cooling system, lubri-
cates the water pump and prevents
freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish
your coolant in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in Section 7.
Before winter, have your coolant tested to
assure that its freezing point is sufficient
for the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the bat-
tery and cables as described in Section
7. The level of charge in your battery can
be checked by an authorized Hyundai
dealer or a service station.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some climates it is recommended that
a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be
used during cold weather. See Section 9
for recommendations. If you aren't sure
what weight oil you should use, consult
an authorized Hyundai dealer.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as described in
Section 7 and replace them if necessary.
Also check all ignition wiring and compo-
nents to be sure they are not cracked,
worn or damaged in any way.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into
the key opening. If a lock is covered with
ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing
fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is
frozen internally, you may be able to thaw
it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window washer
system from freezing, add an approved
window washer anti-freeze solution in
accordance with instructions on the con-
tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is
available from an authorized Hyundai
dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do
not use engine coolant or other types of
anti-freeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
Driving your vehicle
385
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position.
This is most likely to happen when there
is an accumulation of snow or ice around
or near the rear brakes or if the brakes
are wet. If there is a risk the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only temporar-
ily while you put the gear selector lever in
P (automatic transaxle) or in first or
reverse gear (manual transaxle) and
block the rear wheels so the car cannot
roll. Then release the parking brake.
Don't let ice and snow accumu-
late underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice
can build up under the fenders and inter-
fere with the steering. When driving in
severe winter conditions where this may
happen, you should periodically check
underneath the car to be sure the move-
ment of the front wheels and the steering
components is not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the weath-
er where you drive your car, you should
carry appropriate emergency equipment.
Some of the items you may want to carry
include tire chains, tow straps or chains,
flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a
shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,
gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket,
etc.
539
Driving your vehicle
If you are considering towing with your
car, you should first check with your
state’s Department of Motor Vehicles to
determine their legal requirements.
Since laws vary from state to state the
requirements for towing trailers, cars, or
other types of vehicles or apparatus may
differ. Ask an authorized Hyundai dealer
for further details before towing.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify
what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the infor-
mation in “Weight of the trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different than
just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling,
durability, and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering requires correct equip-
ment, and it has to be used properly.
This section contains many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your
safety and that of your passengers.
Please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the
engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and
tires are forced to work harder against
the load of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads. This
additional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the pulling
requirements.
TRAILER TOWING
WARNING - Towing a trail-
er
If you don't use the correct equip-
ment and drive improperly, you can
lose control when you pull a trailer.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well - or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously or
fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in
this section.
WARNING - Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the total
trailer weight, gross combination
weight, gross vehicle weight, gross
axle weight and trailer tongue load
are all within the limits.
CAUTION
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in
costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section.
Driving your vehicle
405
Hitches
It's important to have the correct hitch
equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks
going by, and rough roads are a few rea-
sons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
• Will you have to make any holes in the
body of your vehicle when you install a
trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to
seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch.
If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can
get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and
water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not
intended for hitches. Do not attach
rental hitches or other bumper-type
hitches to them. Use only a frame-
mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
Safety chains
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not
drop to the road if it becomes separated
from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by
the trailer manufacturer. Follow the man-
ufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trailer.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to federal
and/or local regulations and that it is
properly installed and operating correctly.
If your trailer weighs more than the max-
imum trailer weight without trailer brakes
loaded, then it needs its own brakes and
they must be adequate. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
• Don’t tap into your vehicle's brake sys-
tem.
WARNING - Trailer brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolutely
certain that you have properly set
up the brake system. This is not a
task for amateurs. Use an experi-
enced, competent trailer shop for
this work.
541
Driving your vehicle
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting out
for the open road, you must get to know
your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the
feel of handling and braking with the
added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not
nearly so responsive as your vehicle is
by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch
and platform, safety chains, electrical
connector(s), lights, tires and mirror
adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer mov-
ing and then apply the trailer brake con-
troller by hand to be sure the brakes are
working. This lets you check your electri-
cal connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be
sure that the load is secure, and that the
lights and any trailer brakes are still work-
ing.
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-
cle ahead as you would when driving
your vehicle without a trailer. This can
help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up
ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,
because of the increased vehicle length,
you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel
with one hand. Then, to move the trailer
to the left, just move your hand to the left.
To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone guide
you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so your
trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,
road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has
to have a different turn signal flasher and
extra wiring. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you
signal a turn or lane change. Properly
connected, the trailer lights will also flash
to alert other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows
on your instrument panel will flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signals
when, in fact, they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trail-
er bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you discon-
nect and then reconnect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting system
directly to your vehicle’s lighting system.
Use only an approved trailer wiring har-
ness.
An authorized Hyundai dealer can assist
you in installing the wiring harness.
WARNING
Failure to use an approved trailer
wiring harness could result in dam-
age to the vehicle electrical system
and/or personal injury.
Driving your vehicle
425
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before you start down a long or steep
downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you
might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer
operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and
reduce your speed to around 20 mph (30
km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine
and transaxle overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the max-
imum trailer weight without trailer brakes
and you have an automatic transaxle,
you should drive in D (Drive) when tow-
ing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when
towing a trailer will minimize heat build up
and extend the life of your transaxle.
Parking on hills
Generally, you should not park your vehi-
cle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.
People can be seriously or fatally injured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer can
be damaged if they begin a downhill tra-
jectory.
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here’s how to do it:
1. Apply your brakes, but don’t shift into
gear.
2. Have someone place chocks under
the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place,
release the brakes until the chocks
absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brakes. Apply your park-
ing brake, and then shift to R
(Reverse) for a manual transaxle or P
(Park) for an automatic transaxle.
5. Release the brakes.
CAUTION
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not over-
heat. If the needle of the coolant
temperature gauge moves across
the dial towards “H” (HOT), pull
over and stop as soon as it is safe
to do so, and allow the engine to
idle until it cools down. You may
proceed once the engine has
cooled sufficiently.
• You must decide driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transaxle
overheating.
WARNING - Parking on a
hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill with a
trailer attached could cause seri-
ous injury or death, should the trail-
er break lose.
543
Driving your vehicle
When you are ready to leave after park-
ing on a hill
1. With the manual transaxle in Neutral
or automatic transaxle in P (Park),
apply your brakes and hold the brake
pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of
the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and
store the chocks.
Maintenance when trailer towing
Your vehicle will need service more often
when you regularly pull a trailer.
Important items to pay particular atten-
tion to include engine oil, automatic
transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cooling
system fluid. Brake condition is another
important item to frequently check. Each
item is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review
these sections before you start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your trailer
and hitch. Follow the maintenance
schedule that accompanied your trailer
and check it periodically. Preferably, con-
duct the check at the start of each day’s
driving. Most importantly, all hitch nuts
and bolts should be tight.
WARNING - Parking brake
It can be dangerous to get out of
your vehicle if the parking brake is
not firmly set.
If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly. You
or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
CAUTION
• Due to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur
in hot days or during uphill driv-
ing. If the coolant gauge indicates
over-heating, switch off the A/C
and stop the vehicle in a safe area
to cool down the engine.
• When towing check transaxle
fluid more frequently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped
with the air conditioner, you
should install a condenser fan to
improve engine performance
when towing a trailer.
Driving your vehicle
445
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if you
decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control.You can
ask a hitch dealer about sway control.
• Do not do any towing with your car dur-
ing its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in
order to allow the engine to properly
break in. Failure to heed this caution
may result in serious engine or
transaxle damage.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to con-
sult an authorized Hyundai dealer for
further information on additional
requirements such as a towing kit, etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moder-
ate speed (less than 60 mph (100
km/h)).
• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed
45 mph (70 km/h) or the posted towing
speed limit, whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important consider-
ations that have to do with weight:
Item lbs. (kg)
750 (340)
1500 (680)
165 (75)
42.9 (1090)
Maximum trailer
weight
Maximum permissible static vertical load on
the coupling device
Recommended distance from rear wheel center
to coupling point
inch (mm)
Without brake System
With brake System
545
Driving your vehicle
Weight of the trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be? It
should never weigh more than the maxi-
mum trailer weight with trailer brakes. But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your
trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and how
often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer
are all important. The ideal trailer weight
can also depend on any special equip-
ment that you have on your vehicle.
Weight of the trailer tongue
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure because it
affects the total gross vehicle weight
(GVW) of your vehicle. This weight
includes the curb weight of the vehicle,
any cargo you may carry in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
The trailer tongue should weigh a maxi-
mum of 10% of the total loaded trailer
weight. After you've loaded your trailer,
weigh the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are prop-
er. If they aren’t, you may be able to cor-
rect them simply by moving some items
around in the trailer.
WARNING - Trailer
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be loaded
with approximately 60% of the
total trailer load; the rear should
be loaded with approximately
40% of the total trailer load.
(Continued)
C190E02JM
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
C190E01JM
Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight
Driving your vehicle
465
(Continued)
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or trail-
er towing equipment. Improper
loading can result in damage to
your vehicle and/or personal
injury. Check weights and loading
at a commercial scale or highway
patrol office equipped with
scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer can
cause loss of vehicle control.
547
Driving your vehilcle
Tire and loading information label
The label located on the driver's door
sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle
capacity weight.
Vehicle capacity weight:
850 lbs (385 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity:
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity:
Without trailer brakes:
750 lbs (340 kg)
With trailer brakes:
1500 lbs (680 kg)
Towing capacity is the maximum
trailer weight including its cargo
weight, your vehicle can tow.
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trail-
er.
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
OHD056900N
Driving your vehicle
485
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. (635 kg), and there will be five
150 lbs. (68 kg) passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (295 kg).
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs. or
635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
C190F01JM
Item Description Total
AVehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight 300 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 (136 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
1100 lbs
Luggage weight (499 kg)
Example 1
ABC
549
Driving your vehilcle
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pil-
lar.
This label shows the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
C190F02JM
Item Description Total
AVehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight 750 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 (340 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
650 lbs
Luggage weight (295 kg)
ABC
Example 2
C190F03JM
Item Description Total
AVehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight 860 lbs
172 lbs (78 kg) × 5 (390 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
540 lbs
Luggage weight (245 kg)
ABC
Example 3
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific informa-
tion about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The com-
bined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle's capacity weight.
OHD056901N
Driving your vehicle
505
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go
to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle.Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the center-
line.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
WARNING - Over loading
• Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle
and vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
cause an accident or vehicle
damage. You can calculate the
weight of your load by weigh-
ing the items (or people)
before putting them in the
vehicle. Be careful not to over-
load your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR, either
the maximum front or rear
GAWR and vehicle capacity
weight. If you do, parts, includ-
ing tires on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the
way your vehicle handles and
braking ability. This could
cause you to lose control and
crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
WARNING
• Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your
vehicle's tires and possible
tire failure that could lead to a
crash.
• Overloading your vehicle can
cause increased stopping dis-
tances that could lead to a
crash.
• A crash resulting from poor
handling vehicle damage, tire
failure, or increased stopping
distances could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
551
Driving your vehilcle
WARNING - Loose cargo
Items you carry inside your
vehicle can strike and injure
occupants in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
• Put items in the cargo area of
your vehicle. Try to spread the
weight evenly.
• Never stack items, like suit-
cases, inside the vehicle
above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured
child restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure it.
• Do not drive with a seat folded
down unless necessary.
CAUTION
• Overloading your vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would
not be covered by your war-
ranty. Do not overload your
vehicle.
• Using heavier suspension
components to get added
durability might not change
your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your
vehicle the right way.
Driving your vehicle
525
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to
keep your loaded vehicle weight within its
design rating capability, with or without a
trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehicle
design performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with the fol-
lowing terms for determining your vehi-
cle's weight ratings, with or without a
trailer, from the vehicle's specifications
and the compliance label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle including
a full tank of fuel and all standard equip-
ment. It does not include passengers,
cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer
plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added to
the Base Curb Weight, including cargo
and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) - including vehicle
curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). These numbers are shown on
the compliance label.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual
Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the com-
pliance label located on the driver’s door
sill.
Overloading
WEIGHT OF THE VEHICLE
WARNING - Vehicle weight
The gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) and the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) for your vehi-
cle are on the manufacturer's label
attached to the driver's center pil-
lar. Exceeding these ratings can
cause an accident or vehicle dam-
age. You can calculate the weight of
your load by weighing the items
(and people) before putting them in
the vehicle. Be careful not to over-
load your vehicle.
6
Road warning / 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving / 6-2
If the engine will not start / 6-3
Emergency starting / 6-4
If the engine overheats / 6-5
Tires pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-7
If you have a flat tire / 6-12
Towing / 6-20
What to do in an emergency
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehi-
cle is stopped near the edge of a road-
way.
Depress the flasher switch with the igni-
tion switch in any position. The flasher
switch is located in the center console
switch panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using the
hazard warning flasher while the vehi-
cle is being towed.
If you have a flat tire while driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and let the car slow down while driving
straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes
immediately or attempt to pull off the
road as this may cause a loss of con-
trol. When the car has slowed to such
a speed that it is safe to do so, brake
carefully and pull off the road. Drive off
the road as far as possible and park on
firm, level ground. If you are on a divid-
ed highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2.When the car is stopped, turn on your
emergency hazard flashers, set the
parking brake and put the transaxle in
P (automatic transaxle) or reverse
(manual transaxle).
3.Have all passengers get out of the car.
Be sure they all get out on the side of
the car that is away from traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow the
instruction provided later in this sec-
tion.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
WHILE DRIVING
OHD046044L
63
What to do in an emergency
If engine stalls while driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized Hyundai dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1. If your car has an automatic transaxle,
be sure the gear selector lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-
gency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate the
starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be
sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start
it. See instructions for "Jump starting".
If engine turns over normally but
does not start
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the OFF
position, check all connectors at igni-
tion, coil and spark plugs. Reconnect
any that may be disconnected or
loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-
partment.
4. If the engine still does not start, call an
authorized Hyundai dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
WARNING
If the engine will not start, do not
push or pull the car to start it. This
could result in a collision or cause
other damage. In addition, push or
pull starting may cause the catalyt-
ic converter to be overloaded and
create a fire hazard.
What to do in an emergency
46
EMERGENCY STARTING
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow the jump starting proce-
dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-
mend that you have a competent techni-
cian or towing service jump start your
vehicle.
Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-
volt and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the illustration.
First connect one end of a jumper
cable to the positive terminal of the
discharged battery (1), then connect
the other end to the positive terminal
on the booster battery (2). Proceed to
connect one end of the other jumper
cable to the negative terminal of the
booster battery (3), then the other end
to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for
example, the engine lifting bracket)
away from the battery (4). Do not con-
nect it to or near any part that moves
when the engine is cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to con-
tact anything except the correct battery
terminals or the correct ground. Do not
lean over the battery when making
connections.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by
use of a 24-volt power supply (either
two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery pro-
duces hydrogen gas which may
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
• Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte level
is low; the battery may rupture or
explode.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode causing serious injury.
1VQA4001
Discharged battery
Jumper Cables
Booster battery
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
65
What to do in an emergency
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at 2,000
rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-
cle with the discharged battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, you should have your vehi-
cle checked by an authorized Hyundai
dealer.
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section for
jump-starting.
If your temperature gauge indicates over-
heating, you experience a loss of power,
or hear loud pinging or knocking, the
engine is probably too hot. If this hap-
pens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Place the gear selector lever in P
(automatic transaxle) or neutral (man-
ual transaxle) and set the parking
brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn
it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under
the car or steam is coming out from
the hood, stop the engine. Do not open
the hood until the coolant has stopped
running or the steaming has stopped.
If there is no visible loss of engine
coolant and no steam, leave the
engine running and check to be sure
the engine cooling fan is operating. If
the fan is not running, turn the engine
off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive
belt is missing. If it is not missing,
check to see that it is tight. If the drive
belt seems to be satisfactory, check for
coolant leaking from the radiator,
hoses or under the car. (If the air con-
ditioning had been in use, it is normal
for cold water to be draining from it
when you stop).
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken
or engine coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and call the
nearest authorized Hyundai dealer for
assistance.
CAUTION
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
CAUTION - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative ter-
minal of the discharged battery.
This can cause the discharged bat-
tery to overheat and crack, releas-
ing battery acid.
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
WARNING
While the engine is running, keep
hair, hands and clothing away from
moving parts such as the fan and
drive belts to prevent injury.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This can
allow coolant to be blown out of the
opening and cause serious burns.
What to do in an emergency
66
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine tem-
perature has returned to normal. Then,
if coolant has been lost, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir to bring the
fluid level in the reservoir up to the
halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for
further signs of overheating. If over-
heating happens again, call an author-
ized Hyundai dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
67
What to do in an emergency
TIRES PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale
(2) TPMS Malfunction Indicator
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire caus-
es the tire to overheat and can lead
to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-
dling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is provided by a
separate telltale, which displays the
symbol "TPMS" when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pres-
sure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
tions may occur for a variety of rea-
sons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
indicator after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
OHD067001
What to do in an emergency
86
Low tire pressure tell-
tale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning telltale is illuminat-
ed, one or more of your tires is sig-
nificantly under-inflated.
Immediately reduce your speed,
avoid hard cornering and anticipate
increased stopping distances. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible. Inflate the tires to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s placard or tire inflation
pressure label located on the driver’s
side center pillar outer panel. If you
cannot reach a service station or if
the tire cannot hold the newly added
air, replace the low pressure tire with
the compact spare tire. Because the
compact spare tire is not equipped
with a tire pressure sensor, the
TPMS malfunction indicator may go
on and the Low Tire Pressure telltale
still turn on after restarting and about
20 minutes of continuous driving
before you have the low-pressure tire
repaired and replaced on the vehicle.
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires will cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure telltale may be
illuminated if the tire pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a proportional
lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
69
What to do in an emergency
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator
comes on and stays on when there is
a problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an under-
inflation warning at the same time as
system failure then it will illuminate
both the TPMS malfunction and the
low tire pressure telltale e.g. If Front
Left sensor fails, the TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator comes on, but if Front
Right, Rear Left, or Rear Right tire is
under-inflated, the low tire pressure
telltale may come on with the TPMS
malfunction indicator.
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible to determine the cause
of the problem.
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure Telltale will turn on. Have
the flat tire repaired by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble or replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
TPMS
CAUTION
NEVER use a puncture-repair-
ing agent to repair and/or inflate
a low pressure tire. If used, you
will have to replace the tire pres-
sure sensor.
CAUTION
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may be illuminated if the
vehicle is moving around elec-
tric power supply cable or
radio transmitter such as
police stations, government
and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
tower, etc. which can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may be illuminated if snow
chains or some electronic
devices, such as notebook
computers, are used in the
vehicle. This can interfere with
normal operation of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
What to do in an emergency
106
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the compact spare tire, the
TPMS malfunction indicator may illu-
minate and the low tire pressure tell-
tale still illuminate after restarting
and about 20 minutes of continuous
driving.
Once the low pressure tire is re-inflat-
ed to the recommended pressure
and installed on the vehicle, the
TPMS malfunction indicator and the
low tire pressure telltale will be extin-
guished. If the low pressure and
TPMS malfunction indicators are not
extinguished after about 20 minutes
of continuous driving, please visit an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
You may not be able to identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always use
a good quality tire pressure gauge to
measure the tire's inflation pressure.
Please note that a tire that is hot
(from being driven) will have a higher
pressure measurement than a tire
that is cold (from sitting stationary for
at least 3 hours and driven less than
1 mile (1,6 km) during that 3 hour
period). Allow the tire to cool before
measuring the inflation pressure.
Always be sure the tire is cold before
inflating to the recommended pres-
sure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
WARNING - TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
CAUTION
• Do not use any tire sealant if
your vehicle is equipped with
a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System. The liquid sealant can
damage the tire pressure sen-
sors.
• In order for the system to cor-
rectlymonitor tires for under-
inflation, there should be a
total of exactly 4 sensors fit-
ted to each of the four driven
wheel positions. There should
be no other sensors in the
vehicle including spare tire
since this could cause the
system to monitor the wrong
sensors.
611
What to do in an emergency
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
WARNING - Protecting
TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
126
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Jack and tools
The spare tire, jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench are stored in
the luggage compartment. Remove
the luggage under tray out of the way
to reach this equipment.
1. Jack handle
2. Jack
3. Wheel lug nut wrench
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
OHD066002N
WARNING - Changing tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on level firm ground.
If you cannot find a firm, level
place off the road, call a tow-
ing service company for
assistance.
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle; never
use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jack
support.
(Continued)
613
What to do in an emergency
Removing and storing the spare
tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tires
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into R
(Reverse) with manual transaxle
or P (Park) with automatic
transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-
er.
OHD066003
(Continued)
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death. No person
should place any portion of
their body under a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack;
use vehicle support stands.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
1VQA4022
What to do in an emergency
146
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
1JBA6504 OHD066004
WARNING -
Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
chocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
615
What to do in an emergency
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame. The jacking positions
are plates welded to the frame
with two tabs and a raised dot to
index with the jack.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 1.2 in (30 mm).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be
slid over the other studs.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
1JB6025 OUN046018
What to do in an emergency
166
10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight. The nuts should be installed
with their tapered small diameter
ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tire to be sure it is completely
seated, then tighten the nuts as
much as possible with your fin-
gers again.
11. Lower the car to the ground by
turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise. Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle.
Go around the wheel tightening
every other nut until they are all tight.
Then double-check each nut for
tightness. After changing wheels,
have a technician tighten the wheel
nuts to their proper torque as soon
as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:
65~79 lb.ft (9~11 kg.m)
OUN046019
WARNING
Wheels and wheel covers may
have sharp edges. Handle them
carefully to avoid possible
severe injury. Before putting the
wheel into place, be sure that
there is nothing on the hub or
wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,
etc.) that interferes with the
wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
If there is, remove it. If there is
not good contact on the mount-
ing surface between the wheel
and hub, the wheel nuts could
come loose and cause the loss
of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the
vehicle. This may cause serious
injury or death.
617
What to do in an emergency
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is
not replaced, air may leak from the
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as pos-
sible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, consult an author-
ized Hyundai dealer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tire pressure
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tire. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to Section 9,
Specifications.
What to do in an emergency
186
Important - use of compact spare tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regu-
lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).
✽✽NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible per-
sonal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately 1
inch (25 mm), which could result in
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING
The temporary spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
temporary spare at speeds over
50 mph (80 kmh). The original
tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as is possible
to avoid failure of the spare
possibly leading to personal
injury or death.
CAUTION
• You should drive carefully
when the compact spare is in
use. The compact spare
should be replaced by the
proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle
is not recommended with
more than one compact spare
tire in use at the same time.
619
What to do in an emergency
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use tire chains on the com-
pact spare tire. Because of the
smaller size, a tire chain will not fit
properly. This could damage the
vehicle and result in loss of the
chain.
• The compact spare tire should not
be installed on the front axle if the
vehicle must be driven in snow or
on ice.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• The temporary spare tire should
not be used on any other wheels,
nor should standard tires, snow
tires, wheel covers or trim rings be
used with the temporary spare
wheel. If such use is attempted,
damage to these items or other car
components may occur.
• Do not use more than one tempo-
rary spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the tem-
porary spare tire is installed.
What to do in an emergency
206
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an author-
ized Hyundai dealer or a commercial
tow-truck service. Proper lifting and tow-
ing procedures are necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel
dollies or flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines information,
refer to section 5 “Driving your vehicle”.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground (without dol-
lies) and the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-
sion components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the front
wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly
under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
front of the vehicle should always be lift-
ed, not the rear.
HNF4015
D080B02NF
D080B01NF
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards
with the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equip-
ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
CAUTION
Before towing, check the level of
the automatic transaxle fluid. If it is
below the "HOT" range on the dip-
stick, add fluid. If you cannot add
fluid, a towing dolly must be used.
dolly
621
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an emer-
gency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-
tion.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by an authorized
Hyundai dealer or a commercial tow
truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be tem-
porarily towed using a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing hook
under the front (or rear) of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-
tance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, power train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-
cle out of mud, sand or other condi-
tions from which the vehicle cannot be
driven out under its own power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the
vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequent-
ly.
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle shift
lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter-
nal damage to the transaxle.
OHD066005
OMG065013
Front
Rear
What to do in an emergency
226
• Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Always pull straight ahead.
• Use a towing strap less than 16 feet (5
m) long. Attach a white or red cloth
(about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in the
middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap
is not loosened during towing.
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for tow-
ing may damage the body of your
vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifi-
cally intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the
cable or chain to the towing hook
provided.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and tow-
ing cable or chain. The hook and
towing cable or chain may break
and cause serious injury or dam-
age.
• If the disabled vehicle is unable
to be moved, do not forcibly con-
tinue the towing. Contact an
authorized Hyundai dealer or a
commercial tow truck service for
assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle dur-
ing towing.
OUN046024
623
What to do in an emergency
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the
steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Press the brake pedal with more force
than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake per-
formance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
Tie-down hook
(for flatbed towing)
OHD066006L
WARNING
Do not use the hooks under the
front of the vehicle for towing pur-
poses. These hooks are designed
ONLY for transport tie-down. If the
tie-down hooks are used for tow-
ing, the tie-down hooks or front
bumper will be damaged and this
could lead to serious injury.
CAUTION
If the car is being towed with all four
wheels on the ground, it can be
towed only from the front. Be sure
that the transaxle is in neutral. Do
not tow at speeds greater than 25
mph (40 km/h) and for more than 15
miles (25 km). Be sure the steering
is unlocked by placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position. A driver
must be in the towed vehicle to
operate the steering and brakes.
7
Engine compartment / 7-2
Maintenance services / 7-3
Owner maintenance / 7-5
Scheduled maintenance service / 7-7
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-12
Engine oil / 7-15
Engine coolant / 7-16
Brakes and clutch fluid / 7-19
Automatic transaxle fluid / 7-20
Washer fluid / 7-22
Parking brake / 7-22
Air cleaner / 7-23
Climate control air filter / 7-25
Wiper blades / 7-27
Battery / 7-29
Tires and wheels / 7-32
Fuses / 7-45
Light bulbs / 7-54
Appearance care / 7-59
Emission control system / 7-65
California perchlorate notice / 7-67
Maintenance
Maintenance
27
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OHD076002
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Auto transaxle oil dipstick*
9. Radiator cap
10. Engine oil dipstick
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
* : if equipped
■■Gasoline Engine (2.0L)
73
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection proce-
dures.
Should you have any doubts concerning
the inspection or servicing of your vehi-
cle, we strongly recommend that you
have an authorized Hyundai dealer per-
form this work.
An authorized Hyundai dealer has facto-
ry-trained technicians and genuine
Hyundai parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and quality
service, see an authorized Hyundai deal-
er.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational prob-
lems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or person-
al injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽✽NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
You should retain documents that show
proper maintenance has been performed
on your vehicle in accordance with the
scheduled maintenance service charts
shown on the following pages. You need
this information to establish your compli-
ance with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Owner’s Handbook & Warranty
Information Book.
Repairs and adjustments required as a
result of improper maintenance or a lack
of required maintenance are not covered.
We recommend you have your vehicle
maintained and repaired by an author-
ized Hyundai dealer. An authorized
Hyundai dealer meets Hyundai’s high
service quality standards and receives
technical support from Hyundai in order
to provide you with a high level of service
satisfaction.
Maintenance
47
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section, sev-
eral procedures can be done only by an
authorized Hyundai dealer with special
tools.
✽✽NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during
the warranty period may affect warran-
ty coverage. For details, read the sepa-
rate Owner’s Handbook & Warranty
Information Book provided with the
vehicle. If you're unsure about any serv-
icing or maintenance procedure, have it
done by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. You
can be seriously injured while
performing some maintenance
procedures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or the
proper tools and equipment to do
the work, have it done by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
• Working under the hood with the
engine running is dangerous. It
becomes even more dangerous
when you wear jewelry or loose
clothing. These can become
entangled in moving parts and
result in injury. Therefore, if you
must run the engine while work-
ing under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry (espe-
cially rings, bracelets, watches,
and necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose cloth-
ing before getting near the
engine or cooling fans.
75
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks and
inspections that should be performed by
the owner or an authorized Hyundai
dealer at the frequencies indicated to
help ensure safe, dependable operation
of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as
soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labor, parts and
lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant reser-
voir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-ahead
position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-
eling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hard-
to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the oper-
ation of your transaxle occurs, check
the transaxle fluid level.
• Check automatic transaxle P (Park)
function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air condition-
ing system during or after use is nor-
mal).
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause burns
or other serious injury.
Maintenance
67
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-
nals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
• Check radiator, heater and air condi-
tioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray and
wiper operation. Clean wiper blades
with clean cloth dampened with wash-
er fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields
and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel
lug nuts.
At least once a year :
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and
hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake (and clutch) fluid
level.
77
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if
the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply. If
any of the following conditions apply, fol-
low Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy
areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in cold
temperatures and/or extremely humid
climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy city
traffic during hot weather above 90°F
(32°C).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than the
following Normal Maintenance Schedule.
After 120 month or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) continue to follow the pre-
scribed maintenance intervals.
Maintenance
87
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all
vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is deter-
mined by whichever occurs first.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.
DESCRIPTION
7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150
12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240
6 121824303642485460667278849096102108114120
Replace every 7,500 miles or 12 months
RR
IIIII
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII II
IIIII
IIIII
I I IRI I IRI I IRI I IRII IR
RR
Replace every 100,000 miles
II
IRIRIRIRIR
IIIIIIIIII
EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
FUEL FILTER
FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS
VACUUM HOSE
CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSE
VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP
AIR CLEANER FILTER
SPARK PLUGS
PLATINUM COATED
IRIDIUM COATED
VALVE CLEARANCE *1
FUEL TANK AIR FILTER
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
MILES X 1000
KILOMETERS X 1000
MONTHS
*1: Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
79
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
DESCRIPTION
7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150
12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240
6 121824303642485460667278849096102108114120
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII II
At first, replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 60 months
After that, replace every 25,000 miles (40,000 km) or 24 months
IRIR
IIII
IIIII
IIIIIIRIII
IIIII
IIIIIIIIII
IIIII
IIIIIIIIII
GENERAL ITEMS
DRIVE BELT (ALTERNATOR, A/CON, W/PUMP)
COOLANT
TIMING BELT
TENSIONER/IDLER-TIMING BELT
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
BRAKE FLUID
BRAKE HOSES AND LINES
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE
BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS
MILES X 1000
KILOMETERS X 1000
MONTHS
R : Replace
I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
Maintenance
107
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
R : Replace
I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
DESCRIPTION
7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150
12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240
6 121824303642485460667278849096102108114120
IIIIIIIIII
IIIIIIIIII
IIIIIIIIII
IIIIIIIIII
IIIIIIIIII
Replace every 12 months or 10,000 miles (15,000 km)
GENERAL ITEMS
EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER
SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS
/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL
JOINT
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS
AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
MILES X 1000
KILOMETERS X 1000
MONTHS
No.
11
12
13
14
15
16
711
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5miles (8km) in nor-
mal temperature or less than 10miles (16km) in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread
roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold
weather
E - Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
J - Driving over 100 MPH (170 Km/h)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
AIR CLEANER FILTER
SPARK PLUGS
BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS
TIMING BELT/IDLER/TENSIONER
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
R
R
R
I
I
I
I
R
R
R
R
EVERY 3,000 MILES (5,000 KM) OR 3 MONTHS
MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS
EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR 48 MONTHS
EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)
EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)
MORE FREQUENTLY
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K
C, E
B, H
C, D, G, H
C, D, G, H
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
C, D, E, F, H
B, C, D, E, F, G
A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
A, C, E, F, G, H, I
C, E
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart
below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
Maintenance
127
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule. If the car is being
driven in severe conditions, more fre-
quent oil and filter changes are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-
ration and replace if necessary. Drive
belts should be checked periodically for
proper tension and adjusted as neces-
sary.
Fuel filter
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven, damage
the emission system and cause multiple
issues such as hard starting. If an exces-
sive amount of foreign matter accumu-
lates in the fuel tank, the filter may
require replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for leaks
at the connections. Fuel filters should be
installed by trained technicians.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections for leakage and damage. Have
a trained technician replace any dam-
aged or leaking parts immediately.
713
Maintenance
Timing belt
Inspect all parts related to the timing belt
for damage and deformation. Replace
any damaged parts immediately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should
be inspected at those intervals specified
in the maintenance schedule. Make sure
that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is
correctly replaced.
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence
of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,
abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-
cate deterioration. Particular attention
should be paid to examine those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources,
such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with
any heat source, sharp edges or moving
component which might cause heat dam-
age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and cou-
plings, to make sure they are secure, and
that no leaks are present. Hoses should
be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
Air cleaner filter
A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs of
the correct heat range.
Valve clearance
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
A qualified technician should perform the
operation.
Cooling system
Check the cooling system parts, such as
radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and
connections for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
Maintenance
147
Manual transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the manual transaxle fluid
according to the maintenance schedule.
✽✽NOTICE
If the oil level is low, check for possible
leaks before adding oil. Do not overfill.
Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
The fluid level should be in the "HOT"
range of the dipstick, after the engine
and transaxle are at normal operating
temperature. Check the automatic
transaxle fluid level with the engine run-
ning and the transaxle in neutral, with the
parking brake properly applied.
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir. The level should be between
“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of
the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake
fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
specification.
Rear disc brake / linings, parking
brake
Check the rear disc brake and linings for
scoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken
parts, and excessive wear. Inspect the
parking brake system including the park-
ing brake lever and cables.
Brake pads, calipers and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs
for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muf-
fler and hangers for cracks, deterioration,
or damage. Start the engine and listen
carefully for any exhaust gas leakage.
Tighten connections or replace parts as
necessary.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps
for cracks, deterioration, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-
essary, repack the grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
(if equipped)
Check the air conditioning lines and con-
nections for leakage and damage.
715
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level. The level should be between
F and L.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring
the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to refill the new oil com-
fortably.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to the section 9.)
Changing the engine oil and filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by an
authorized Hyundai dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the begin-
ning of this section.
WARNING - Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may be
hot enough to burn you.
OHD076004R OHD076006R
Maintenance
167
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-
tory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at the
beginning of the winter season, and
before traveling to a colder climate.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING - Removing
radiator cap
• Never attempt to remove the radi-
ator cap while the engine is oper-
ating or hot. Doing so might lead
to cooling system and engine
damage and could result in seri-
ous personal injury from escap-
ing hot coolant or steam.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Turn the engine off and wait until
it cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the cap,
using a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
• Even if the engine is not operat-
ing, do not remove the radiator
cap or the drain plug while the
engine and radiator are hot. Hot
coolant and steam may still blow
out under pressure, causing seri-
ous injury.
ENGINE COOLANT
PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irrita-
tion or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for prolonged
periods of time. Used engine oil
contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory ani-
mals. Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used oil.
717
Maintenance
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-
rated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the side of the
coolant reservoir when the engine is
cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protection
against freezing and corrosion. Bring the
level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent
additions are required, see an authorized
Hyundai dealer for a cooling system
inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• Use only soft (de-mineralized) water in
the coolant mixture.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be pro-
tected by an ethylene-glycol-based
coolant to prevent corrosion and freez-
ing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-
lowing table.
OHD076008
5°F (-15°C) 35 65
-13°F (-25°C) 40 60
-31°F (-35°C) 50 50
-49°F (-45°C) 60 40
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Antifreeze Water
Maintenance
187
Changing the coolant
Have coolant changed by an authorized
Hyundai dealer according to the
Maintenance Schedule at the beginning
of this section.
WARNING - Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and
steam may blow out under pres-
sure causing serious injury.
OHD076009
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under cer-
tain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
or occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is poi-
sonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink and avoid contact-
ing windshield washer fluid.
Serious injury or death could
occur.
719
Maintenance
BRAKES AND CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED) FLUID
Checking the brake/clutch fluid
level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-
odically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake/clutch fluid, clean the area
around the reservoir cap thoroughly to
prevent brake/clutch fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level. The level will fall with accumulated
mileage. This is a normal condition asso-
ciated with the wear of the brake linings.
If the fluid level is excessively low, have
the brake system checked by an author-
ized Hyundai dealer.
Use only the specified brake/clutch fluid.
(Refer to the section 9.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
WARNING - Brake fluid
When changing and adding
brake/clutch fluid, handle it careful-
ly. Do not let it come in contact with
your eyes. If brake/clutch fluid
should come in contact with your
eyes, immediately flush them with a
large quantity of fresh tap water.
Have your eyes examined by a doc-
tor as soon as possible.
WARNING - Loss of brake
fluid
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized Hyundai dealer.
OHD076011
CAUTION
Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to
contact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result.
Brake/clutch fluid, which has been
exposed to open air for an extended
time should never be used as its
quality cannot be guaranteed. It
should be disposed of properly.
Don't put in the wrong kind of fluid.
A few drops of mineral-based oil,
such as engine oil, in your
brake/clutch system can damage
brake/clutch system parts.
Maintenance
207
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
Checking the automatic transaxle
fluid level
The automatic transaxle fluid level
should be checked regularly.
Keep the vehicle on the level ground with
the parking brake applied and check the
fluid level according to the following pro-
cedure.
1. Place the selector lever in N (Neutral)
position and confirm the engine is run-
ning at normal idle speed.
2. After the transaxle is warmed up suffi-
ciently (fluid temperature 70~80°C
(158~176°F), for example by 10 min-
utes usual driving, move the shift lever
through all positions then place the
selector lever in “N (Neutral) or P
(Park)” position.
3. Confirm that the fluid level is in “HOT”
range on the level gauge. If the fluid
level is lower, add the specified fluid
from the fill hole. If the fluid level is
higher, drain the fluid from the drain
hole.
4. If the fluid level is checked in cold con-
dition (fluid temperature 20~30°C
(68~86°F) add the fluid to “COLD” line
and then recheck the fluid level
according to the above step 2.
OHD076012 OHD076045N
721
Maintenance
✽✽NOTICE
“COLD” range is for reference only and
should NOT be used to determine
transaxle fluid level.
✽✽NOTICE
New automatic transaxle fluid should be
red. The red dye is added so the assem-
bly plant can identify it as automatic
transaxle fluid and distinguish it from
engine oil or antifreeze. The red dye,
which is not an indicator of fluid quali-
ty, is not permanent. As the vehicle is
driven, the automatic transaxle fluid
will begin to look darker. The color may
eventually appear light brown.
Therefore, have an authorized Hyundai
dealer change the automatic transaxle
fluid according to the Scheduled
Maintenance at the beginning of this
section.
Use only the specified automatic
transaxle fluid. (Refer to the section 9.)
Changing the automatic transaxle
fluid
Have automatic transaxle fluid changed
by an authorized Hyundai dealer accord-
ing to the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this section.
WARNING - Transaxle fluid
The transaxle fluid level should be
checked when the engine is at nor-
mal operating temperature. This
means that the engine, radiator,
radiator hose and exhaust system
etc., are very hot. Exercise great
care not to burn yourself during
this procedure.
WARNING - Parking brake
To avoid sudden movement of the
vehicle, apply parking brake and
depress the brake pedal before
moving the shift lever.
CAUTION
• Low fluid level causes transaxle
slippage. Overfilling can cause
foaming, loss of fluid and transaxle
malfunction.
• The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunc-
tion and failure.
Maintenance
227
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid level
The reservoir is translucent so that you
can check the level with a quick visual
inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain
water may be used if washer fluid is not
available. However, use washer solvent
with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
Checking the parking brake
Check the stroke of the parking brake by
counting the number of “clicks’’ heard
while fully applying it from the released
position. Also, the parking brake alone
should securely hold the vehicle on a fair-
ly steep grade. If the stroke is more or
less than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized Hyundai
dealer.
Stroke : 7 “clicks’’ at a force of
44 lbs (20 kg, 196 N).
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under cer-
tain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
or occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is poi-
sonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink and avoid contact-
ing windshield washer fluid.
Serious injury or death could
occur.
OHD076013 OHD056005
PARKING BRAKE
723
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary, and
should not be cleaned and reused.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching
clips and open the cover.
2. Replace the air cleaner filter.
3. Lock the cover with the cover attaching
clips.
OHD076016 OHD076017 OHD076018
Maintenance
247
Replace the filter according to the
Scheduled Maintenance Section.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-
ment more often than the usual recom-
mended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage condi-
tions” in this section.)
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in exces-
sive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner fil-
ter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use a Hyundai genuine part. Use
of nongenuine parts could dam-
age the air flow sensor.
725
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should be
replaced every 10,000 miles (15,000
km). If the vehicle is operated in the
severely air-polluted cities or on dusty
rough roads for a long period, it should
be inspected more frequently and
replaced earlier. When you, the owner,
replace the climate control air filter,
replace it performing the following proce-
dure, and be careful to avoid damaging
other components.
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box and remove the
support rod.
2. With the glove box open, remove the
stoppers on both sides to allow the
glove box to hang freely on the hinges.
OHD046065 OHD076020 OHD076021
Maintenance
267
3. Remove the climate control air filter
case pulling out the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
✽✽NOTICE
When replacing the climate control air
filter install it according to the “AIR
FLOWÈÈ” identification marks.
Otherwise, the system may produce
noise and the effectiveness of the filter
may be reduced.
OHD076022 OHD076023
727
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
✽✽NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-
matic car washes have been known to
make the windshield difficult to clean.
Contamination of either the windshield or
the wiper blades with foreign matter can
reduce the effectiveness of the wind-
shield wipers. Common sources of con-
tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-
ing properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean ade-
quately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
1JBA5122 CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manual-
ly.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
Maintenance
287
Front windshield wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper
blade assembly to expose the plastic
locking clip.
2. Compress the clip and slide the blade
assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
1LDA5023
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
1JBA7037
1JBA7038
729
Maintenance
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for
an extended time, disconnect the bat-
tery cables.
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and
all other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Hydrogen, a highly com-
bustible gas, is always
present in battery cells and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID.
Do not allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a
pain or a burning sensa-
tion, get medical attention
immediately.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
(Continued)
BATTERY
OHD076024
Maintenance
307
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example, the
headlights or interior lights were left on
while the vehicle was not in use),
recharge it by slow charging (trickle)
for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while the
vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-
30A for two hours.
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Sunroof (See Chapter 4)
• Trip computer (See Chapter 4)
• Climate control system
(See Chapter 4)
• Clock (See Chapter 4)
• Audio (See Chapter 4)
• Auto up/down window (See chapter 4)
(Continued)
• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-
tery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
leak, resulting in personal injury.
Lift with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with the
engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Failure to follow the above warn-
ings can result in serious bodily
injury or death.
PROPOSITION 65 WARN-
ING
Battery posts, terminals, and relat-
ed accessories contain lead and
lead compounds, chemicals known
to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm.
Batteries also contain other chemi-
cals known to the State of
California to cause cancer. Wash
hands after handling.
731
Maintenance
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in an
area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,
or flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charg-
ing, and stop or reduce the charg-
ing rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if
the temperature of the electrolyte
of any cell exceeds 120°F (49°C).
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
WARNING
• Before performing maintenance
or recharging the battery, turn off
all accessories and stop the
engine.
• The negative battery cable must
be removed first and installed
last when the battery is discon-
nected.
Maintenance
327
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
one mile (1.6 km).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tire wear.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
WARNING - Tire underin-
flation
Severe underinflation (10 psi
(70 kPa) or more) can lead to
severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
OHD086003
WARNING
• Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and
sudden tire failure leading to
accidents, injuries, and even
death. Always check tires are
properly inflated before driv-
ing.
• Driving on tires with no or
insufficient tread is danger-
ous. Worn-out tires can result
in loss of vehicle control, col-
lisions, and injury and even
death. Worn-out tires should
be replaced as soon as possi-
ble and should never be used
for driving. Always check tire
tread before driving your car.
733
Maintenance
WARNING - Tire inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than one mile (1.6
km) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
CAUTION
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an author-
ized Hyundai dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread, and
a greater possibility of dam-
age from road hazards.
CAUTION
• Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pres-
sures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41
kPa). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-
inflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
Maintenance
347
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure.You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by look-
ing at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
WARNING
• Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too lit-
tle pressure wear unevenly
causing poor handling, loss of
vehicle control, and sudden
tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even
death. The recommended cold
tire pressure for your vehicle
can be found in this manual
and on the tire label located
on the driver's side of the cen-
ter pillar.
• Worn tires can cause acci-
dents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tire.
Hyundai recommends that
you check the spare every
time you check the pressure
of the other tires on your vehi-
cle.
735
Maintenance
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to Section 9, “Specifications”.
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
✽✽NOTICE
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
WARNING
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
S2BLA790
S2BLA790A
CBGQ0707A
Without a spare tire
With a full-size spare tire (if equipped)
Directional tires (if equipped)
Maintenance
367
Wheel alignment and tire balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
1LDA5026
Tread wear indicator
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
WARNING - Replacing
tires
To reduce the chance or serious
or fatal injuries from an acci-
dent caused by tire failure or
loss of vehicle control:
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effec-
tiveness, steering control, and
traction.
• Do not drive your vehicle with
too little or too much pressure
in your tires. This can lead to
uneven wear and tire failure.
• When replacing tires, never
mix radial and bias-ply tires
on the same car. You must
replace all tires (including the
spare) if moving from radial to
bias-ply tires.
(Continued)
737
Maintenance
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer calibration, head-
light aim and bumper height.
(Continued)
• Using tires and wheel other
than the recommended sizes
could cause unusual handling
characteristics and poor vehi-
cle control, resulting in a seri-
ous accident.
• Wheels that do not meet
Hyundai's specifications may
fit poorly and result in dam-
age to the vehicle or unusual
handling and poor vehicle
control.
Maintenance
387
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P205/55R16 89H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P” are
intended for use on passenger
cars or light trucks; however, not
all tires have this marking).
205 - Tire width in millimeters.
55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
I030B04JM
1
1
23
4
5,6
7
739
Maintenance
89 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.0JX16
6.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger cars. The speed
rating is part of the tire size designa-
tion on the sidewall of the tire. This
symbol corresponds to that tire's
designed maximum safe operating
speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years, based
on the manufacturing date, tire
strength and performance, decline
with age naturally (even unused
spare tires). Therefore, the tires
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1606 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2006.
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Maintenance
407
4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric are in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading Tread
wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
because of variations in driving
habits, service practices and differ-
ences in road characteristics and cli-
mate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicles
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tires ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
WARNING - Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires tread, It is recommended
that tires generally be replaced
after 6 years of normal service.
Heat caused by not climates or
frequent high loading
Conditions can accelerate the
aging process. Failure to follow
this Warning can result in sud-
den tire failure, which could
lead to a loss of control and an
accident involving serious
injury or death.
741
Maintenance
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel than minimum
required by law.
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional acces-
sories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmis-
sion, power seats, and air condition-
ing.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive loading,
either separately or in combina-
tion, can cause heat build-up
and possible tire failure.
Maintenance
427
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into
the sidewall of a tire signifying that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor
vehicle safety standards. The DOT
code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
ignator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear Axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-
mum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that
tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight:The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
ticular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seat-
ed.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
743
Maintenance
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear
bars," that show across the tread of a
tire when only 2/32 inch of tread
remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
ber of designated seating positions
multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due to
curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
ly attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and rec-
ommended inflation pressure.
All season tires
Hyundai specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good per-
formance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
Hyundai specifies summer tires on
some models to provide superior
performance on dry roads. Summer
tire performance is substantially
reduced in snow and ice. Summer
tires do not have the tire traction rat-
ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
side wall. if you plan to operate your
vehicle in snowy or icy conditions.
Hyundai recommends the use of
snow tires or all season tires on all
four wheels.
Maintenance
447
Snow tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28
kPa) more air pressure than the
pressure recommended for the stan-
dard tires on the tire label on the dri-
ver's side of the center pillar, or up to
the maximum pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120
km/h) when your car is equipped with
snow tires.
Tire chains
Tire chains, if necessary, should be
installed on the drive wheels (front
wheels).
Be sure that the chains are installed
in accordance with the manufactur-
er's instructions.
To minimize tire and chain wear, do
not continue to use tire chains when
they are no longer needed.
WARNING - Snow or ice
• When driving on roads cov-
ered with snow or ice, drive at
less than 20 mph (30 km/h).
• Use the SAE “S” class or wire
chains.
• If you have noise caused by
chains contacting the body,
retighten the chain to avoid
contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage,
retighten the chains after driv-
ing 0.3~0.6 miles.
• Do not use tire chains on
vehicles equipped with alu-
minum wheels. In unavoid-
able circumstance, use a wire
type chain.
• Use wire chains less than
15mm to prevent damage to
the chain’s connection.
CAUTION
• If you hear noise caused by
chains contacting the body,
retighten the chain to avoid
contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage,
retighten the chains after driv-
ing 0.3 ~ 0.6 miles (0.5 ~ 1.0 km).
745
Maintenance
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one locat-
ed in the driver’s side panel bolster, the
other in the engine compartment near
the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will be
melted.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-
cates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and immediately
consult an authorized Hyundai dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type
for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,
and fusible link for higher amperage rat-
ings.
1VQA4037
Normal
Normal
Blade type
Cartridge type
Fusible link
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
WARNING - Fuse replace-
ment
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire instead of the
proper fuse - even as a temporary
repair. It may cause extensive
wiring damage and a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove fuses
because it may cause a short circuit
and damage the system.
Maintenance
467
Inner panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool provided on the
main fuse box in the engine compart-
ment.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigar lighter fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical com-
ponents do not work and the fuses are
OK, check the fuse block in the engine
compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must
be replaced.
OHD076025
Driver’s side panel
OHD076026
747
Maintenance
Memory fuse
Your vehicle is equipped with the memo-
ry fuse to prevent battery discharge if
your vehicle is parked without being
operated for prolonged periods. Use the
following procedures before parking the
vehicle for prolonged periods.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and
pull up the memory fuse.
✽✽NOTICE
• If the memory fuse is pulled up from
the fuse panel, the warning chime,
audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,
will not operate. Some items must be
reset after replacement. Refer to
“Battery” in this section.
• Even though the memory fuse is
pulled up, the battery can still be dis-
charged by operation of the head-
lights or other electrical devices.
Engine compartment panel fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by press-
ing the tap and pulling up.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,
use the fuse puller in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
OHD076027 OHD076028
Maintenance
487
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽✽NOTICE
If the main fuse is blown, consult an
Authorized Hyundai Dealer.
CAUTION
After checking the fuse box in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse box cover. If not,
electrical failures may occur from
water leaking in.
OHD076030
749
Maintenance
✽✽NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your vehi-
cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.
When you inspect the fuse box on your
vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
Engine compartment
OHD076031L/OHD076032
Fuse/Relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay
name and capacity.
Driver’s side panel
Maintenance
507
Driver's side fuse panel
Description Fuse rating Protected component
START 10A Ignition lock switch, Antitheft alarm, Transaxle range switch
A/CON SW 10A A/C control module
HTD MIRR 10A Outside heated mirror motor
SEAT HTR 15A Seat warmer switch
A/CON 10A Blower relay, A/C control module, Sunroof control module
HEAD LAMP 10A Head lamp relay
FR WIPER 25A Front wiper relay
RR WIPER 15A (Spare)
DRL 15A Daytime running lamp unit
WCS 10A Occupant classification sensor
P/WDW DR 25A Power window main switch, Rear power window switch(LH)
CLOCK 10A Digital clock, Audio
C/LIGHTER 15A Power outlet
DR LOCK 20A Sunroof control module, Door unlock/lock relay
DEICER 15A -
STOP 15A Stop lamp switch
ROOM LP 15A Trunk room lamp, Dome lamp, Map lamp, Digital clock, Home link
AUDIO 15A Audio
T/LID 15A Trunk lid relay
AMP 25A Amplifier
SAFETY P/WDW 25A Safety power window module
P/WDW ASS 25A Front & rear power window switch(RH), Power window main switch
P/OUTLET 15A Power outlet
T/SIG 10A Hazard switch
A/BAG IND 10A Airbag indicator(instrument cluster)
751
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected component
CLUSTER 10A Instrument cluster, EPS module, ESC switch
A/BAG 15A SRS control module
SPARE 15A (Spare)
SPARE 15A (Spare)
TAIL RH 10A Head lamp(RH), Glove box lamp, Rear combination lamp(RH), License lamp
TAIL LH 10A Head lamp(LH), Power window main switch, Rear combination lamp(LH), License lamp
Maintenance
527
Engine compartment
Description Fuse rating Protected component
ALTERNATOR 125A Generator
EPS 80A EPS control module
ABS.2 20A ESC control module, ABS control module, Multi purpose check connector
ABS.1 40A ESC control module, ABS control module, Multi purpose check connector
B+.1 50A Instrument panel junction box
Fusible link RR HTD 40A Instrument panel junction box
BLOWER 40A Blower relay
C/FAN 40A Condenser fan #1, 2 relay
B+.2 50A Instrument panel junction box
IGN.2 40A Ignition switch, Start relay
IGN.1 30A Ignition switch
ECU 30A Main relay, ECM
SPARE.1 20A (Spare)
FR FOG 15A Front fog lamp relay
A/CON 10A A/C relay
Fuse HAZARD 15A Hazard switch, Hazard relay
F/PUMP 15A Fuel pump relay
INJ 15A A/C relay, Fuel pump relay, Injector #1,2,3,4, ECM, Idle speed actuator etc.
SNSR.2 10A Pulse generator 'A', 'B’, Stop lamp switch, Vehicle speed sensor etc.
HORN 15A Horn relay
753
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected component
ABS 10A ESC control module, ABS control module, Multi purpose check connector
ECU.2 10A ECM
B/UP 10A Back up lamp switch, Transaxle range switch, Cruise control module
H/LP LO RH 10A Head lamp(RH)
Fuse H/LP LO LH 10A Head lamp(LH)
H/LP HI 20A Head lamp Hi relay
SNSR.1 10A Oxygen sensor, ECM, Mass air folw sensor etc.
SPARE 10A (Spare)
SPARE 15A (Spare)
SPARE 20A (Spare)
Maintenance
547
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
✽✽NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or washing,
headlight and taillight lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused by
the temperature difference between the
lamp inside and outside. This is similar to
the condensation on your windows inside
your vehicle during the rain and doesn’t
indicate a problem with your vehicle. If
the water leaks into the lamp bulb cir-
cuitry, have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
Headlight, position light, turn sig-
nal light, front fog light bulb
replacement
(1) Headlight (High)
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Position light
(4) Front turn signal light
(5) Side mark light
(6) Front fog light (if equipped)
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure
that the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position and turn off
the lights to avoid sudden move-
ment of the vehicle and burning
your fingers or receiving an electric
shock.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electric
wiring system.
CAUTION
If you don’t have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
consult an authorized Hyundai
dealer. In many cases, it is difficult
to replace vehicle light bulbs
because other parts of the vehicle
must be removed before you can
get to the bulb. This is especially
true if you have to remove the head-
light assembly to
get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing
the headlight
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
OHD076034
755
Maintenance
Headlight bulb
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlight.
3. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the headlight bulb assem-
bly by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Install a new headlight bulb assembly.
G270A030N
WARNING -
Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-
ized gas that will produce flying
pieces of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abra-
sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids. Never touch
the glass with bare hands.
Residual oil may cause the bulb
to overheat and burst when lit. A
bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlight.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
OMG075038N
Maintenance
567
6. Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-
ing it clockwise.
7. Install the headlight.
Turn signal light/position light, side
mark light, fog light bulb (if equipped)
If the light bulb is not operating, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
(1) Back-up light
(2) Rear turn signal light
(3) Stop and tail light
(4) Side mark light
1. Open the trunk lid
2. Remove the service cover by pulling out
the service cover.
OHD076037 OHD076038
757
Maintenance
3. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
7. Install the service cover by putting it
into the service hole.
High mounted stop light bulb
replacement
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the socket by turning it coun-
terclockwise.
3. Replace the bulb from the socket.
4. Install the socket by turning it clock-
wise.
License plate light bulb replace-
ment
1. Loosen the lens retaining screws with
a cross-tip screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens securely with the
lens retaining screws.
OHD076039 1JBA7031 OHD076040
Maintenance
587
Interior light bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
OHD076041
Front map lamp
OHD076042
Dome lamp
OHD076043
Sunvisor lamp
OHD076044
Glove box lamp
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF” but-
ton is depressed to avoid burning
your fingers or receiving an electric
shock.
CAUTION
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
759
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-
ing, you should wash it after each off-
road trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are kept
clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow for-
ward speed.
CAUTION
Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do not
wash the vehicle in direct sunlight
or when the body of the vehicle is
warm.
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine com-
partment including high pressure
water washing may cause the fail-
ure of electrical circuits located in
the engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electri-
cal/electronic components inside
the vehicle as this may damage
them.
OJB037800
Maintenance
607
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
✽✽NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repair or replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preserva-
tive. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause discol-
oration or paint deterioration.
761
Maintenance
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may col-
lect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on underbody parts such as the
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system, even though they have been
treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because
it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and
frame members have drain holes that
should not be allowed to clog with dirt;
trapped water in these areas can cause
rusting.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated with a
clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-
ishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum wheels. They
may scratch or damage the finish.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-
gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads. This helps pre-
vent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with high-
speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any acid detergent. It may
damage and corrode the aluminum
wheels coated with a clear protective
finish.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow for-
ward speed.
Maintenance
627
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corro-
sion, we produces cars of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of the
job. To achieve the long-term corrosion
resistance your vehicle can deliver, the
owner's cooperation and assistance is
also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the
car.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings
by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor
scrapes and dents which leave unpro-
tected metal exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car is
regularly exposed to corrosive materials,
corrosion protection is particularly impor-
tant. Some of the common causes of
accelerated corrosion are road salts,
dust control chemicals, ocean air and
industrial pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which
corrosion is most likely to occur. For
example, corrosion is accelerated by
high humidity, particularly when tempera-
tures are just above freezing. In such
conditions, the corrosive material is kept
in contact with the car surfaces by mois-
ture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it is
slow to dry and holds moisture in contact
with the vehicle. Although the mud
appears to be dry, it can still retain the
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dis-
persed. For all these reasons, it is par-
ticularly important to keep your car clean
and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only to
the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
763
Maintenance
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from get-
ting started by observing the following:
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your car clean and free of corrosive
materials. Attention to the underside of
the car is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra
care to prevent corrosion. In winter,
hose off the underside of your car at
least once a month and be sure to
clean the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the compo-
nents under the fenders and other
areas that are hidden from view. Do a
thorough job; just dampening the accu-
mulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather
than prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly effec-
tive in removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be
sure that drain holes are kept open so
that moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favor-
able environment for corrosion. This is
particularly true if you wash your car in
the garage or drive it into the garage
when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can
contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as
possible to reduce the possibility of cor-
rosion. If bare metal is showing through,
the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-
ly corrosive and may damage painted
surfaces in just a few hours. Always
remove bird droppings as soon as possi-
ble.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats
and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check
under the mats periodically to be sure
the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if
you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or
chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks should
be cleaned up, flushed with clean water
and thoroughly dried.
Maintenance
647
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as per-
fume and cosmetic oil from contacting
the dashboard because they may cause
damage or discoloration. If they do con-
tact the dashboard, wipe them off imme-
diately. See the instructions that follow for
the proper way to clean vinyl.
Cleaning the upholstery and interior
trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recom-
mended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its color can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-
bing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-
tions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-
cle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with
electrical/electronic components
inside the vehicle as this may dam-
age them.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
765
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty infor-
mation contained in the Owner’s
Handbook & Warranty Information book-
let in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-
sion control system to meet all emission
regulations.
There are three emission control sys-
tems which are as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of
the emission control systems, it is rec-
ommended that you have your car
inspected and maintained by an author-
ized Hyundai dealer in accordance with
the maintenance schedule in this manu-
al.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-
ing during dynamometer testing,
turn the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system off by pressing the
ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is com-
pleted, turn the ESC system back on
by pressing the ESC switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation sys-
tem is employed to prevent air pollution
caused by blow-by gases being emitted
from the crankcase.This system supplies
fresh filtered air to the crankcase through
the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
which then pass through the PCV valve
into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission control
(including ORVR: Onboard
Refueling Vapor Recovery)
System
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
(The ORVR system is designed to allow
the vapors from the fuel tank to be
loaded into a canister while refueling at
the gas station, preventing the escape of
fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the
canister are drawn into the surge tank
through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is con-
trolled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-
ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-
es so that evaporated fuel is not taken
into the engine. After the engine warms-
up during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the
engine.
Maintenance
667
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control System is
a highly effective system which controls
exhaust emissions while maintaining
good vehicle performance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could affect
its performance, safety or durability and
may even violate governmental safety
and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification
may not be covered under warranty.
Engine exhaust gas precautions (car-
bon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately. If you ever sus-
pect exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all the
windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-
cle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to restart the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain car-
bon monoxide (CO). Though color-
less and odorless, it is dangerous
and could be lethal if inhaled.
Follow the instructions on this
page to avoid CO poisoning.
PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide variety
of automobile components and
parts, including components found
in the interior furnishings in a vehi-
cle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component
wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
767
Maintenance
Operating precautions for catalyt-
ic converters
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso-
line engine.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-
formance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control sys-
tem. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
• Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.
If you run out of gasoline, it could
cause the engine to misfire and result
in excessive loading of the catalytic
converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void your
warranties.
Perchlorate Material-special handling
may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz-
ardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials, such as
airbag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners
and keyless remote entry batteries, must
be disposed of according to Title 22
California Code of Regulations Section
67384.10 (a).
WARNING - Fire
A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your vehi-
cle. Do not park the vehicle over or
near flammable objects, such as
grass, vegetation, paper, leaves,
etc.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
NOTICE
8
Label information / 8-2
Consumer information / 8-4
Reporting safety defects / 8-5
Binding arbitration (U.S.A only) / 8-5
Consumer information
Consumer information
28
Vehicle identification number
(VIN)
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
the number used in registering your car
and in all legal matters pertaining to its
ownership, etc.
It can be found on the floor under the
passenger seat. To check the number,
remove the cover.
VIN label Certification label
LABEL INFORMATION
OHD086001
Frame number
OVQ076002N OHD086007
83
Consumer information
Tire specification/pressure label
The tires supplied on your new vehicle
are chosen to provide the best perform-
ance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's side
of the center pillar outer panel gives the
tire pressures recommended for your car.
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
OHD086003 OHD086005
Consumer information
48
This consumer information has been pre-
pared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration of the U.S.
Department of Transportation. It provides
the purchasers and/or prospective pur-
chasers of Hyundai automobiles with
information on uniform tire quality grad-
ing. Your Hyundai dealer will help answer
any questions you may have as you read
this information.
Hyundai motor vehicles are designed
and manufactured to meet or exceed all
applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly
urge you to read and follow all directions
in this Owner's Manual, particularly the
information under the headings
"NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-
ING".
If, after reading this manual, you have
any questions regarding the operation of
your vehicle, please contact your nearest
Hyundai Motor America Regional Office
as listed in the following:
Eastern Region: Connecticut, Delaware,
Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, New
Hampshire, New Jersey, New York,
Pennsylvanina, Rhode Island, Vermont,
Virginia, West Virginia.
Eastern Region
1100 Cranbury South River Road
Jamesburg, NJ 08831
(800) 633-5151
Southern Region: Florida, Georgia,
North Carolina, South Carolina.
Southern Region
270 Riverside Parkway, Suite A
Austell, GA 30168
(800) 633-5151
South Central Region: Alabama,
Arkansas, Colorado, Kansas, Louisiana,
Mississippi, Missouri, New Mexico,
Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas, Wyoming.
South Central Region
1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400
Coppell, TX 75019
(800) 633-5151
Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa,
Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota,
Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota,
Ohio, Wisconsin.
Central Region
1705 Sequoia Drive
Aurora, Illinois 60506
(800) 633-5151
Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii,
Arizona, California, ldaho, Montana,
Nevada, Oregon, Texas, Utah,
Washington.
Western Region
10550 Talbert Avenue
P.O.Box 20850
Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850
(800) 633-5151
CONSUMER INFORMATION
85
Consumer information
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR
AMERICA. If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You
can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Any claim or dispute you may have relat-
ed to your vehicle's warranty or the duties
contemplated under the warranty, includ-
ing claims related to the refund or partial
refund of your vehicle's purchase price
(excluding personal injury or product lia-
bility claims), shall be resolved by binding
arbitration. Binding arbitration shall be
administered by and through the National
Arbitration Forum (NAF) or the American
Arbitration Association (AAA), under the
Code of Procedure of the entity you
select.
You will not be responsible for paying fil-
ing and hearing fees above $275.00. All
other arbitration costs shall be borne by
Hyundai Motor America. You are not
responsible to pay any of the costs
Hyundai incurs.
This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall
not deprive you of any remedies avail-
able to you under applicable law. The
parties are waiving their right to seek
remedies in court, including the right to a
jury trial.
This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall
be governed by and interpreted under
the Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C. sec-
tions 1-16. Judgment upon any award
may be entered in any court having juris-
diction.
You may revoke this Arbitration
Agreement by (1) written notice or (2)
electronic notice. Written notice must be
delivered (via certified mail) to Hyundai
Motor America, Attn: Consumer Affairs,
10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box 20849,
Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849.
Electronic notice must be submitted at
the following website address: http://war-
ranty-arbitration.hyundaiUSA.com.
Notice must be received within 90 days
after you purchase your vehicle.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS BINDING ARBITRATION (U.S.A ONLY)
9
Dimensions / 9-2
Bulb wattage / 9-2
Tires and wheels / 9-3
Specifications
Specifications
29
Item in (mm)
Overall length 177.4 (4505)
Overall width 69.9 (1775)
Overall height 58.3 (1480)
Front tread 60.7 (1543), 60.2 (1529)*1
Rear tread 60.7 (1541), 60.1 (1526)*1
Wheelbase 104.3 (2650)
DIMENSIONS
Light Bulb Wattage
Headlights (Low) 55
Headlights (High) 55
Front turn signal/Position lights 28/8
Side mark lights 5
Front fog lights* 27
Stop and tail lights 27/8
Rear turn signal lights 27
Back-up lights 18
High mounted stop light 18
License plate lights 5
Front map lamps 10
Center dome lamps 10
Trunk room lamp 5
Glove box lamp 5
Vanity mirror lamps* 5
BULB WATTAGE
* : If equipped
*1: with 205/55R16 tire
93
Specifications
Inflation pressure
psi (kPa)
Front Rear
P195/65R15 89T 5.5J×15 32 (220) 32 (220)
P205/55R16 89H 6.0J×16
T125/80D15 95M 4.0T×15 60 60
(420) (420)
Full size tire
Compact
spare tire
Wheel lug nut torque lb•ft
(kg•m, N•m)
65~79
(9~11, 88~107)
TIRES AND WHEELS
Item Tire
size Wheel size
Specifications
49
Recommended lubricants and capacities
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct
lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
*1Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*2Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel nec-
essary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and
energy savings.
Lubricant Volume Classification
4.23 US qt. (4.0 l)
Manual transaxle fluid 2.11 US qt. (2.0 l) API Service GL-4 (SAE 75W-85, fill for-life)
HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP-III, DIAMOND ATF SP-III,
Automatic transaxle fluid 6.97 US qt. (6.6 l) SK ATF SP-III or other brands metting the SP-III specification
approved by Hyundai Motor Co.
Coolant 6.97 US qt. (6.6 l)MIXTURE, Antifreeze with water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)
Brake/Clutch fluid 0.7~0.8 US qt. (0.7~0.8 l) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel 14 US gal. (53 l)-
Engine oil *1 *2
(drain and refill)
<Recommends>
API Service SJ, SL or above,
ILSAC GF-3 or above
95
Specifications
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold weather
operation (engine start and engine oil
flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils
can provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however, higher
viscosity engine oils are required for sat-
isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those rec-
ommended could result in engine dam-
age.
When choosing an oil, consider the range
of temperature your vehicle will be oper-
ated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended oil
viscosity from the chart.
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or drain-
ing any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine
and other mechanisms that could
be damaged.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Gasoline
Engine Oil *
1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-
20,5W-30 (API SJ, SL / ILSAC GF-3 or above). However, if the engine oil is not available in
your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
I
Index
Index
2
I
Air cleaner ··································································· 7-23
Airbag-advanced supplemental restraint system ········· 3-29
Driver's and passenger's front air bag ······················ 3-37
SRS components and functions ······························· 3-30
Occupant classification system ································ 3-32
Side air bag ······························································· 3-42
Curtain air bag ·························································· 3-43
Air bag warning label ··············································· 3-54
Appearance care ·························································· 7-59
Audio system ······························································· 4-87
M420 ········································································ 4-92
M445 ········································································ 4-97
M465 ······································································ 4-103
Automatic climate control system ······························· 4-69
Automatic transaxle ····················································· 5-10
Ignition key interlock system ··································· 5-14
Automatic transaxle operation ································· 5-11
Transaxle ranges ······················································· 5-12
Shift lock system ······················································ 5-14
Automatic transaxle fluid ············································ 7-20
Battery ········································································· 7-29
Before driving ································································ 5-3
Binding arbitration (U.S.A only) ··································· 8-5
Brake system ······························································· 5-16
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ································· 5-19
Parking brake ··························································· 5-18
Power brakes ···························································· 5-16
Brakes and clutch fluid ················································ 7-19
Bulb wattage ·································································· 9-2
California perchlorate notice ·········································7-67
Child restraint system ·················································· 3-21
Tether anchor system ··············································· 3-25
Child seat lower anchors ·········································· 3-27
Placing a passenger seat belt into the auto lock
mode ········································································· 3-23
Climate control air filter ·············································· 7-25
Consumer information ··················································· 8-4
Cruise control system ·················································· 5-26
Defroster ······································································ 4-59
Dimensions ···································································· 9-2
Door locks ····································································· 4-8
Central door lock switch ············································ 4-9
Child-protector rear door lock ·································· 4-11
Economical operation ·················································· 5-30
A
B
C
D
E
I3
Index
Emergency starting ························································ 6-4
Emission control system ·············································· 7-65
Engine compartment ······················································ 7-2
Engine coolant ····························································· 7-16
Engine oil ····································································· 7-15
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ············· 7-12
Fuel filler lid ································································ 4-20
Fuel requirements ·························································· 1-3
Fuses ············································································ 7-45
Hazard warning flasher ··············································· 4-51
Hood ············································································ 4-18
How to use this manual ················································· 1-2
If the engine overheats ·················································· 6-5
If the engine will not start ············································· 6-3
If you have a flat tire ··················································· 6-12
Changing tires ·························································· 6-13
Removing the spare tire ··········································· 6-13
Storing the spare tire ················································ 6-13
Important - use of compact spare tire ······················ 6-18
In case of an emergency while driving ························· 6-2
Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster ················· 1-7
Instrument cluster ························································ 4-38
Gauges ······································································ 4-40
Engine temperature gauge ········································ 4-38
Fuel gauge ································································ 4-40
Instrument panel illumination ·································· 4-39
Odometer/Trip odometer ·········································· 4-41
Speedometer ····························································· 4-39
Tachometer ······························································· 4-39
Instrument panel overview ············································ 2-3
Interior features ··························································· 4-82
Ashtray ····································································· 4-82
Cigarette lighter ························································ 4-82
Clothes hanger ·························································· 4-86
Cup holder ································································ 4-83
Digital clock ····························································· 4-85
Power outlet ····························································· 4-84
Shopping bag holder ················································ 4-85
Sunvisor ···································································· 4-83
Interior light ································································· 4-56
Interior overview ··························································· 2-2
Key positions ································································· 5-4
Keys ··············································································· 4-2
F
H
I
K
Index
4
I
Label information ·························································· 8-2
Light bulbs ··································································· 7-54
Lighting ······································································· 4-51
Maintenance services ····················································· 7-3
Manual climate control system ··································· 4-60
Manual transaxle ··························································· 5-7
Mirrors ········································································· 4-30
Owner maintenance ······················································· 7-5
Parking brake ······························································· 7-22
Remote keyless entry ····················································· 4-3
Reporting safety defects ················································ 8-5
Road warning ································································· 6-2
Scheduled maintenance service ····································· 7-7
Seat ················································································ 3-2
Armrest ······································································· 3-9
Headrest ······································································ 3-5
Front seat adjustment ················································· 3-3
Rear seat adjustment ·················································· 3-8
Seatback pocket ·························································· 3-7
Seat warmer ································································ 3-6
Seat belts ······································································ 3-12
Seat belt precautions ················································ 3-18
Care of seat belts ······················································ 3-20
Driver's 3-point system ············································ 3-13
Passenger's 3-point system ······································· 3-14
3-point rear center belt ············································· 3-14
Pre-tensioner belt ····················································· 3-15
Special driving conditions ··········································· 5-32
Starting the engine ························································· 5-5
Steering wheel ····························································· 4-28
Storage compartment ··················································· 4-80
Center console storage ············································· 4-80
Glove box ································································· 4-80
Sunglass holder ························································ 4-81
Sunroof ········································································ 4-23
Theft-alarm system ························································ 4-6
Tires and wheels ·························································· 7-32
M
S
O
P
R
T
L
I5
Index
Tires and wheels ···························································· 9-3
Tires pressure monitoring system (TPMS)······················6-7
Towing ········································································· 6-20
Tie-down hook ························································· 6-23
Trailer towing ······························································ 5-39
Hitches ······································································ 5-40
Safety chains ···························································· 5-40
Trailer brakes ···························································· 5-40
Weight of the trailer (tongue) ··································· 5-45
Trunk ············································································ 4-12
Vehicle break-in process ················································ 1-5
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders ·········· 1-6
Vehicle load limit ························································· 5-47
Compliance label ······················································ 5-49
Tire and loading information label ·························· 5-47
Vehicle capacity weight ··········································· 5-47
Seating capacity ······················································· 5-47
Towing capacity ······················································· 5-47
Cargo capacity ·························································· 5-47
Washer fluid ································································· 7-22
Weight of the vehicle ··················································· 5-52
Windows ······································································ 4-14
Power window lock button ······································ 4-17
Windshield defrosting and defogging ························· 4-77
Automatic climate control system ··························· 4-78
Defogging logic ························································ 4-78
Manual climate control system ································ 4-77
Winter driving ······························································ 5-35
Snow tires ································································· 5-35
Tire chains ································································ 5-35
Wiper blades ································································ 7-27
Wipers and washers ····················································· 4-54
V
W
This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.
OWNER'S INFORMATION
ORIGINAL OWNER _____________________________________________________
ADDRESS
CITY _________________ STATE ___________ ZIP CODE _____________________
DELIVERY DATE
(Date Sold to Original Retail Purchaser)
DEALER NAME _______________ DEALER NO. _____________________________
ADDRESS ____________________________________________________________
CITY _________________ STATE ___________ ZIP CODE _____________________
A2HO-EU76A
